{"title":"Seating \u0026 Daily Living","description":"\u003cp\u003eExplore equipment that makes everyday living more comfortable and manageable, from lift chairs and supportive seating to cushions, ramps, therapy aids and practical daily living tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShop by type:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/power-recliner-lift-chairs\"\u003elift chairs\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/cushioning\"\u003ecushions\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/supportive-and-rehab-seating\"\u003esupportive and rehab seating\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/daily-living-aids\"\u003edaily living aids\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/ramps\"\u003eramps\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/therapy-aids\"\u003etherapy aids\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAdvice Hub:\u003c\/strong\u003e Read our \u003ca href=\"\/blogs\/guides\/lift-chair-buying-guide-choose-the-right-chair\"\u003eLift Chair Buying Guide\u003c\/a\u003e for help with fit, seat dimensions and room clearance. For tools that reduce bending, stretching and grip effort, start with \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/daily-living-aids\"\u003edaily living aids\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"long-handle-toe-nail-scissors","title":"Long Handle Toe Nail Scissors","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLong Handle Toe Nail Scissors\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese \u003cstrong\u003eLong Handle Toe Nail Scissors\u003c\/strong\u003e are designed to provide extra reach for routine toenail trimming when ordinary nail scissors are difficult to position. The extended handle reduces how far the hand needs to travel toward the feet, while the angled cutting head helps bring the blades into a more practical position around the nail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey can be useful for people who find bending at the hips or reaching the feet awkward, particularly when nail care is carried out from a stable seated position. The longer reach does not remove the need for good visibility and hand control, so the user should still be able to see the nail clearly and guide the blades safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eExtra Reach Without a Powered Mechanism\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe simple manual design avoids batteries or motorised parts. Instead, the benefit comes from extending the distance between the user's hand and the cutting head, which can make basic foot care more accessible without adding a complicated mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe comfort-grip handles are intended to provide controlled operation, while the angled blades reduce the need to hold the scissors at the same steep angle as a short grooming tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest for Routine Nail Care\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese scissors are intended for ordinary toenail trimming. Very thick, distorted, damaged or painful nails may be difficult or unsafe to cut with standard scissors and should not be forced.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ePeople with diabetes, significantly reduced sensation, circulation concerns or other conditions that make foot injury more consequential should follow their usual professional foot-care advice rather than relying on a long-handled tool alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCleaning and Storage\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep the blades clean and dry after use and inspect the hinge and handles before trimming. Personal grooming tools are best kept for individual use unless they are appropriately cleaned between users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore the scissors where the cutting edges cannot be contacted accidentally and keep them away from children.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtended handle\u003c\/strong\u003e for easier reach to the feet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAngled blades\u003c\/strong\u003e help position the cutting edge at the toenail.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eComfort-grip handles for controlled everyday use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight manual grooming aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for seated nail-care routines where the user can safely see and control the blades.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are these scissors designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey are designed for routine toenail trimming with more reach than standard nail scissors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the long handle help?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt reduces how far the hand needs to reach toward the foot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy are the blades angled?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe angled cutting head helps bring the blades into a more practical position around the toenail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they be used while seated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the user has a stable seated position and can clearly see and control the cutting area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre they powered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. They are manual scissors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre they suitable for fingernails?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey are primarily intended for toenails, where extra reach is most useful.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they trim very thick nails?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eVery thick, distorted or damaged nails may require a more suitable nail tool or professional foot-care advice rather than forcing the scissors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre they suitable if I have reduced sensation in my feet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eExtra caution is needed where sensation is reduced. Follow any foot-care guidance you have been given, particularly if a small cut or skin injury could be difficult to detect.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the blades be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Wipe and dry the blades after use and keep the scissors clean between users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the scissors be shared?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor hygiene, personal grooming tools are best kept for individual use unless they are appropriately cleaned between users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I check before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMake sure the blades and handle are secure, clean and moving normally.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Long Handle Toe Nail Scissors available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. These grooming scissors are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLong-reach toenail scissors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCutting head\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngled blades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtended comfort-grip design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848300107,"sku":"MS-TOENLSS","price":24.5,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/c7ab6ac1-e674b4_ab6e22a78f804aba8929970dca8fe4b5_mv2.webp?v=1754901806"},{"product_id":"food-tray","title":"Food Tray","description":"\u003ch2\u003eClip-On Bamboo Food Tray\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003eClip-On Bamboo Food Tray\u003c\/strong\u003e creates a compact temporary surface over a suitable sofa arm or soft rollator seat. Its flexible folding bamboo slats wrap over the supporting surface, giving you a convenient place for light everyday items such as a drink, snack plate, phone, book or remote without needing a separate freestanding table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause it is removable and folds down when not in use, the tray is particularly useful where space is limited or where a permanent tray is unnecessary. It can move between compatible furniture and mobility equipment as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUseful on a Sofa Arm or Compatible Soft-Seat Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOn a broad sofa arm, the tray creates a flatter surface over upholstery that would otherwise be difficult to use for a cup or plate. On a compatible rollator with a soft seat, it can provide a small stationary tabletop when the walker is parked and the brakes are applied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be useful with suitable soft-seat rollators such as the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.movesmart.nz\/products\/goldfern-x-fold-rollator\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\"\u003eGoldfern X-FOLD\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-carbon-ultralight-walker\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Ultralight\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.movesmart.nz\/products\/uplivin-trive-walker-rollator\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\"\u003eUplivin Trive\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.movesmart.nz\/products\/liberator-heavy-duty-foldable-walker\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\"\u003eAMW Liberator\u003c\/a\u003e, provided the tray sits securely on the individual setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Fit Matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tray depends on the shape and width of the surface beneath it rather than permanent fixings. Sofa arms and rollator seats vary substantially, so the tray should sit flat enough that whatever is placed on it remains stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore using it with food, drinks or valuables, test the empty tray first. On a rollator, apply the parking brakes and keep the walker stationary. The tray should never be used as a handhold or body-weight support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFolding Bamboo Construction\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bamboo slats create a firm top while remaining flexible enough to wrap over a suitable support. When the tray is no longer needed, the slatted construction folds down for compact storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor cleaning, wipe the bamboo with a lightly damp cloth and dry it promptly. Avoid soaking the wood or leaving standing moisture on the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBamboo construction\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible clip-on \/ wrap-over design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProvides a temporary surface for light everyday items.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be used on suitable sofa arms.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan also sit over compatible soft rollator seats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFolds down for compact storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo permanent fixings or powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the tray made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tray is made from bamboo slats joined in a flexible folding format.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it fit a sofa arm?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe flexible tray wraps over a suitable sofa arm and rests on the supporting surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a rollator?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, on a suitable soft-seat rollator where the tray can sit securely and remain level enough for the intended item.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it permanently attached?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a removable tray and requires no permanent fitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it fold for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The slatted design folds down when the tray is not required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat can I put on it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is suitable for light everyday items such as a cup, snack plate, phone or remote when the tray is stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I put very hot cookware on it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvoid placing very hot cookware directly on the bamboo unless an appropriate heat-resistant barrier is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit every sofa arm?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Sofa-arm width, shape and upholstery vary. Check that the tray has enough stable contact before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit every rollator?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is best suited to soft-seat rollators with enough supporting area. Test the fit before loading the tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the rollator brakes be locked while using it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If using the tray on a rollator, apply the parking brakes and keep the rollator stationary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used as a transfer support?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The tray is a surface for light items and should never be leaned on for body-weight support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the bamboo be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe it with a lightly damp cloth and dry it promptly. Avoid soaking the bamboo.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Clip-On Bamboo Food Tray available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This tray is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBamboo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDesign\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexible folding \/ wrap-over tray\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable sofa arms or compatible soft rollator seats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInstallation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable; no permanent fitting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848365643,"sku":"MS-FTBLK","price":75.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/93dcb5de-e674b4_4295208fa27c41789101e565d5eed38b_mv2.webp?v=1754901806"},{"product_id":"long-handle-shoe-horn-and-dressing-aid","title":"Long Handle Shoe Horn and Dressing Aid","description":"\u003ch2\u003e3-in-1 Long Handle Shoe Horn and Dressing Aid\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eLong Handle Shoe Horn and Dressing Aid\u003c\/strong\u003e combines three common dressing functions in one adjustable tool: a long shoe horn, dressing hook and sock-removal aid. The handle extends from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e57 cm to 90 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving the user extra reach while seated or standing and reducing how far the hand needs to travel toward the feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a useful everyday option for people who find bending, reaching or managing clothing around the lower legs awkward. Because the same tool can help with shoes, garments and sock removal, it can reduce the need to keep several separate long-handled dressing aids nearby.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable Reach for Different Dressing Tasks\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe telescoping length lets the user shorten the aid when working closer to the body or extend it when more reach is needed. That flexibility can be useful when moving between a chair, bed and standing dressing routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor safer use, choose a stable seated position whenever balance is uncertain. The dressing aid is not designed to support body weight and should never be leaned on like a walking stick or grab rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThree Useful Ends in One Tool\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe shoe-horn end helps guide the heel into suitable footwear without requiring the hand to reach all the way to the shoe. The dressing hook can help position compatible garments, loops or straps, while the shaped sock-removal end can help ease a sock down the lower leg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGarment and footwear shapes vary, so the tool should be used gently. Avoid forcing the hook or shoe horn where it could snag delicate fabric, damage footwear or scrape the skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompact for Storage and Travel\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe reinforced ABS construction keeps the tool lightweight, and the detachable format makes it easier to pack or store when not in use. Smooth rounded surfaces help reduce snagging on clothing during normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3-in-1 design:\u003c\/strong\u003e shoe horn, dressing aid and sock remover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable length from 57–90 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDetachable construction for storage and travel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight reinforced ABS plastic.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmooth rounded surfaces to reduce snagging on clothing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManual, non-powered daily-living aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat three functions does the tool provide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt combines a long shoe horn, dressing hook and sock-removal aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the adjustable length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe handle adjusts from approximately 57 cm to 90 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used while seated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The adjustable length can be set for a stable seated dressing position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used while standing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the user is stable and does not need to lean or balance unsafely while dressing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the shoe horn end help?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt helps guide the heel into a shoe without requiring the hand to reach all the way to the foot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat can the dressing hook be used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can help guide suitable garments, straps or clothing edges into position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it used to remove socks?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe shaped end can help catch the upper edge of a sock and guide it down the leg where the sock and user's skin allow comfortable use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is it made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current product uses lightweight reinforced ABS plastic.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it come apart for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its detachable design makes it easier to store or pack.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require tools to adjust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo tools are required for normal assembly and adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it work with every type of shoe or clothing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Footwear and garment shapes vary, so use it only where the shaped ends can engage the item without forcing or snagging it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a weight-bearing aid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a dressing tool and must not be used as a cane, grab rail or transfer support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Long Handle Shoe Horn and Dressing Aid available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This dressing aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFunctions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShoe horn; dressing hook; sock remover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustable length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e57–90 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforced ABS plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDetachable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848431179,"sku":"MS-SHLNG","price":35.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/c03c47b8-e674b4_0f3a521b94b84379bb6d84f061f18335_mv2.webp?v=1754901806"},{"product_id":"electronic-blood-pressure-monitor","title":"Electronic Blood Pressure Monitor","description":"\u003ch2\u003eINSMART Electronic Blood Pressure Monitor\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eINSMART Electronic Blood Pressure Monitor\u003c\/strong\u003e is an automatic upper-arm monitor designed for convenient blood-pressure and pulse measurements at home. It uses one-touch operation, a large LCD display and memory for two users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe device stores up to \u003cstrong\u003e99 readings for each of two users\u003c\/strong\u003e. It also includes a voice-broadcast function, colour backlight, an irregular-heartbeat indicator and a cuff designed for arm circumferences of approximately \u003cstrong\u003e22–32 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAutomatic \u003cstrong\u003eupper-arm blood-pressure monitor\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOne-touch operation\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLarge approximately \u003cstrong\u003e50 x 80 mm LCD display\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo-user memory\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStores up to \u003cstrong\u003e99 readings per user\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVoice broadcast\u003c\/strong\u003e of measurement results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-colour display backlight\u003c\/strong\u003e for the device's visual reading classification.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIrregular-heartbeat indicator\u003c\/strong\u003e during measurement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUpper-arm cuff for approximately \u003cstrong\u003e22–32 cm arm circumference\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRechargeable digital design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact for home storage or travel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHome Monitoring, Not a Diagnosis\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA home blood-pressure monitor can help record measurements over time, but a single reading or device indicator does not diagnose a medical condition. Correct cuff size, positioning and measurement technique matter. Follow your healthcare professional's advice about how often to measure and what readings require follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGetting More Consistent Home Readings\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eElectronic Blood Pressure Monitor is most useful when readings are taken with a consistent technique and interpreted as part of a broader health picture. Read the supplied instructions before first use, keep the device clean and use it in the recommended position and environment. Recording results with the date, time and relevant symptoms can make them more useful when discussing health with a clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHome measurements can be affected by movement, recent activity, positioning and technique. Repeat unexpected readings as directed in the manual and seek clinical advice when results or symptoms cause concern. The device supports monitoring but should not delay urgent medical assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere is the cuff worn?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is an upper-arm monitor. The cuff is fitted around the upper arm according to the device instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat arm size does the cuff fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe listed cuff range is approximately 22–32 cm arm circumference.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many people can store readings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe monitor supports two user profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many readings can each user save?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 99 readings can be stored for each user profile.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have voice output?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The monitor includes a voice-broadcast function for measurement results.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the three-colour backlight mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe backlight provides a visual classification generated by the device. It should be treated as a guide rather than a medical diagnosis.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it detect irregular heartbeats?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe monitor includes an irregular-heartbeat indicator that may appear during a measurement. An indicator is not a diagnosis; discuss repeated alerts or concerns with a healthcare professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow large is the display?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe listed LCD display size is approximately 50 x 80 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the monitor rechargeable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The current product is described as rechargeable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould I measure immediately after exercise, caffeine or smoking?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor consistent home readings, follow the measurement instructions supplied with the monitor and any advice from your healthcare professional. Resting quietly before measurement is commonly recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy does cuff size matter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA cuff that does not fit the arm correctly can affect measurement quality. Confirm your arm circumference falls within the listed 22–32 cm range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould I make medication changes based on a home reading?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Do not start, stop or change prescribed medication based only on a home measurement without advice from the healthcare professional managing your treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I do if a reading or symptom concerns me?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the care plan or advice given by your healthcare professional. Seek urgent medical help for severe or concerning symptoms regardless of what the monitor displays.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMeasurement location\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUpper arm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCuff range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 22–32 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUser profiles\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMemory\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e99 readings per user\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDisplay\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 50 x 80 mm LCD\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAudio\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoice broadcast\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdditional indicators\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-colour backlight; irregular-heartbeat indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRechargeable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848627787,"sku":"GM-BP-SL08-P01","price":75.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/852bbb04-e674b4_94c5788fc3d042fd8de52a09a6c3564f_mv2.jpg?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"non-contact-infrared-thermometer","title":"Non-Contact Infrared Thermometer","description":"\u003ch2\u003eNon-Contact Temperature Measurement from 3–5 cm\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern JXB-178 Non-Contact Infrared Thermometer\u003c\/strong\u003e provides contact-free temperature measurement for infants and adults. The thermometer is designed to take forehead measurements from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e3–5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e away, helping reduce the need for direct skin contact between users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThree modes allow measurement of \u003cstrong\u003eBody, Room and Surface\u003c\/strong\u003e temperatures. The unit stores up to \u003cstrong\u003e32 previous measurements\u003c\/strong\u003e, offers Celsius or Fahrenheit display and powers off automatically when not in use. Always follow the supplied operating instructions so the selected mode, measuring distance and ambient conditions are appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUsing an Infrared Thermometer Consistently\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eInfrared thermometers are convenient, but technique matters. Use the correct mode, keep the measuring distance consistent and avoid taking a forehead reading immediately after the person has come in from a markedly hotter or colder environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf a result seems unexpected, repeat the measurement according to the instructions. A temperature reading is one piece of information and should be considered alongside symptoms and appropriate health advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBody, Room and Surface Modes\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBody mode\u003c\/strong\u003e is intended for forehead temperature measurement. \u003cstrong\u003eRoom\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003eSurface\u003c\/strong\u003e modes are provided for environmental or object temperatures and should not be confused with the body-temperature setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 32-reading memory can be useful for comparing recent measurements without writing each one down, while the °C\/°F option lets the display match the user's preferred unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-contact infrared temperature measurement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended measuring distance of approximately 3–5 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBody, Room and Surface modes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMemory for up to 32 measurements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCelsius and Fahrenheit display options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAutomatic power-off.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for forehead temperature measurement in infants and adults.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePowered by two AA batteries.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGetting More Consistent Home Readings\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eNon-Contact Infrared Thermometer is most useful when readings are taken with a consistent technique and interpreted as part of a broader health picture. Read the supplied instructions before first use, keep the device clean and use it in the recommended position and environment. Recording results with the date, time and relevant symptoms can make them more useful when discussing health with a clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHome measurements can be affected by movement, recent activity, positioning and technique. Repeat unexpected readings as directed in the manual and seek clinical advice when results or symptoms cause concern. The device supports monitoring but should not delay urgent medical assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far from the forehead should the thermometer be held?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe JXB-178 instructions specify a measuring distance of approximately 3–5 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat measurement modes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides Body, Room and Surface modes. Select the appropriate mode for what you are measuring.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many readings can it store?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe thermometer stores up to 32 previous measurements in memory.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it display Celsius and Fahrenheit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The unit supports both °C and °F display.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it need to touch the skin?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is designed for non-contact forehead measurement when used at the recommended distance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for infants and adults?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe JXB-178 instructions describe forehead temperature measurement for infants and adults.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it measure room or surface temperature?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Room and Surface modes are provided in addition to Body mode.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat batteries does it use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe JXB-178 uses two AA batteries.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy might two readings differ?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eInfrared readings can be affected by measuring distance, mode, forehead conditions and the surrounding environment. Use a consistent technique and repeat the reading if a result seems unusual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould Body mode be used for objects or room temperature?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Use the dedicated Room or Surface mode for those measurements so the device interprets the infrared reading appropriately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it really provide 100,000 readings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo verified current source was found for the previous 100,000-reading claim, so that claim has been removed from this listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I do if the result seems unusual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRepeat the measurement using the correct mode, distance and operating instructions. Temperature readings should be considered alongside symptoms and appropriate health advice rather than used as a diagnosis by themselves.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Goldfern JXB-178 Infrared Thermometer available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This thermometer is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJXB-178\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMeasurement method\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-contact infrared\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended distance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3–5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody, Room, Surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMemory\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 32 measurements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDisplay units\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e°C \/ °F\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x AA batteries\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower saving\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic power-off\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848758859,"sku":"GM-GBMD-JXB-178","price":179.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/31c82166-e674b4_11477dcada9345208747a83c34dade75_mv2.jpg?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"over-wheelchair-table","title":"Over Wheelchair Table","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Over Wheelchair Table\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Over Wheelchair Table\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a convenient surface for meals, reading, writing and everyday activities while seated in a wheelchair. Its robust \u003cstrong\u003eanodised aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e and wheelchair-friendly base are designed to allow close access without unnecessary obstruction around the chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe table is \u003cstrong\u003eheight adjustable\u003c\/strong\u003e and rolls on \u003cstrong\u003efour smooth-running castors\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy repositioning. The Goldfern instructions specify a \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e; the table should not be sat on or used as a support when standing or sitting down.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnodised aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e for a robust, practical construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWheelchair-compatible base\u003c\/strong\u003e designed to allow close positioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable tabletop\u003c\/strong\u003e for different users and chair setups.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFour smooth-running castors\u003c\/strong\u003e for manoeuvrability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful for meals, reading, writing and compatible personal devices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Over Wheelchair Table?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe table is purpose-designed around wheelchair access rather than being a general household table placed in front of a chair. Its open base, adjustable height and castors make it easier to position a useful work or meal surface close to the user while keeping the setup straightforward for everyday home or care use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlanning the Table Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Over Wheelchair Table is easier to use when the base, column and tabletop can reach the required position without interfering with the wheelchair frame, footrests or wheels. Check the usable height range, base clearance and the direction from which the table will approach. The user should be able to sit comfortably without leaning, twisting or trapping their legs beneath the top.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAllow room for the chair and table to move independently, and apply any provided brakes before placing drinks or equipment on the surface. Keep loads within the published limit and distribute them evenly. Height or angle adjustments should be made carefully so loose objects cannot slide from the tabletop.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the Over Wheelchair Table designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides an accessible surface for everyday activities such as meals, reading, writing and using suitable personal devices while seated in a wheelchair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the frame aluminium?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Goldfern specifies a robust anodised aluminium frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the table height adjustable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The tabletop height can be raised or lowered to suit the user and wheelchair setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the height adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Goldfern instructions use a hand nut and ratchet lever. The hand nut should be loosened before adjusting the tabletop, then tightened again once the preferred height is set.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the safe working load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published safe working load is 10 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I lean on the table when standing up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Goldfern specifically advises not to lean on the table for support when sitting down or standing up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the table be used as a seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a tabletop and must not be sat on.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many castors does it have?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe table has four smooth-running castor wheels for repositioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill the base accommodate a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe base is specifically designed to accommodate wheelchairs and allow close access. Wheelchair dimensions and individual setup should still be checked for fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for home and care environments?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its accessible design makes it suitable for everyday use in homes and care settings where an over-wheelchair surface is useful.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Over Wheelchair Table available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Over Wheelchair Table is available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAnodised aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDesigned to accommodate wheelchairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCastors\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 smooth-running castors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSafe working load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849119307,"sku":"GF-OVRCHRTBL","price":339.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/a860e8f2-e674b4_a1e9265c1817497a882cd63764dd4e3a_mv2.jpg?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"transfer-disc-rolko-easy-transfer","title":"Transfer Disc Rolko Easy TRANSFER","description":"\u003ch2\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Disc\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Disc\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact seated-transfer aid designed to be used during transfers between surfaces such as a wheelchair, bed, chair or compatible vehicle seat. Rolko also lists it for use together with EasyTRANSFER transfer boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e this product is not described by Rolko as a floor-standing foot pivot disc. Follow the product instructions and use it as part of an appropriate seated-transfer technique.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e413 x 413 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e38 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e130 kg carrying capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e2 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e product weight.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated handles for lifting and positioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for seated transfer assistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be combined with Rolko EasyTRANSFER transfer boards.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMDR-compliant medical device.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlanning a Controlled Transfer\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTransfer Disc Rolko Easy TRANSFER is intended to support a specific part of a transfer rather than replace good positioning and an appropriate transfer technique. The starting and destination surfaces should be stable, close enough for the planned movement and arranged so the user and caregiver can work without twisting or reaching unexpectedly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore regular use, confirm that the product’s dimensions and stated load rating suit the user and environment. Clothing, footwear, floor condition and the height difference between surfaces can all affect how smoothly a transfer works. A physiotherapist or occupational therapist can help determine suitability and teach a technique matched to the person’s strength, balance and ability to follow instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the EasyTRANSFER disc used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a seated-transfer accessory intended to assist movement between suitable adjacent surfaces and can be used with Rolko EasyTRANSFER boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a standing pivot disc for the feet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Rolko describes this product as part of its seated-transfer system, not as a floor disc for a standing foot pivot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 413 mm long x 413 mm wide x 38 mm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the carrying capacity?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe capacity is 130 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does it weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 2 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have handles?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Integrated handles make it easier to pick up and position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with the Rolko transfer board?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Rolko lists the disc as compatible with its EasyTRANSFER transfer boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used by every person independently?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Transfer ability varies. Some users require caregiver assistance or professional assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the two transfer surfaces be stable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Beds, chairs and wheelchairs should be stable and appropriately positioned before any transfer begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it replace a hoist?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is not a lifting device. Users who cannot safely complete a seated transfer may require a different transfer method.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould transfer technique be assessed professionally?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, particularly where there is uncertainty about balance, strength, skin integrity or caregiver handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used if damaged?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Stop using it if the surface, structure or handles are damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Rolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Disc available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This transfer disc is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e413 x 413 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCarrying capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatible system\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER boards\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Rolko","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849184843,"sku":"TW-TRNSFRDISC","price":199.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/959ce177-e674b4_be9e44cd8012440bb198dfbd81ce51e7_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"transfer-board-rolko-easy-transfer","title":"Transfer Board Rolko Easy TRANSFER","description":"\u003ch2\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Board – 700 mm\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Board\u003c\/strong\u003e is a 700 mm sliding board designed to bridge short gaps during seated transfers, such as between a wheelchair and bed, chair or compatible vehicle seat. It includes integrated handholds plus recesses shaped to provide clearance around wheelchair tyres and push rims.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e700 mm long x 230 mm wide x 12 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e130 kg carrying capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e1.65 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e product weight.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated handles for positioning and carrying.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecesses for wheelchair tyres and push rims.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for assisted or appropriate independent seated transfers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be combined with the Rolko EasyTRANSFER transfer disc.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMDR-compliant medical device.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSafe Transfer Setup\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA transfer board should bridge two stable surfaces with enough overlap at each end to remain secure. The user's transfer ability, upper-body control and need for assistance should be assessed before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlanning a Controlled Transfer\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTransfer Board Rolko Easy TRANSFER is intended to support a specific part of a transfer rather than replace good positioning and an appropriate transfer technique. The starting and destination surfaces should be stable, close enough for the planned movement and arranged so the user and caregiver can work without twisting or reaching unexpectedly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore regular use, confirm that the product’s dimensions and stated load rating suit the user and environment. Clothing, footwear, floor condition and the height difference between surfaces can all affect how smoothly a transfer works. A physiotherapist or occupational therapist can help determine suitability and teach a technique matched to the person’s strength, balance and ability to follow instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the board used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt helps bridge a short gap so a seated user can move across between suitable surfaces without needing a full standing transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow long is the board?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e700 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow wide and thick is it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 230 mm wide and 12 mm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the carrying capacity?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe carrying capacity is 130 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does it weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 1.65 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy does the board have recesses?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe shaped recesses provide clearance around wheelchair tyres and push rims when the board is positioned beside a wheelchair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used independently?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSome users with appropriate strength, balance and transfer technique may use it independently. Others will require assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be combined with the Rolko transfer disc?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Rolko lists the EasyTRANSFER disc as a compatible accessory.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the board be used for standing transfers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a seated sliding-transfer board and should not be stood on.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it work between any two surfaces?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The surfaces must be stable, close enough together and at suitable heights for the board and user's transfer technique.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it remove the need for transfer training?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. A suitable transfer technique is important. Seek occupational-therapy or physiotherapy guidance if transfer safety is uncertain.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the board be checked before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Do not use it if cracked, damaged, excessively worn or unable to sit securely between the transfer surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Rolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Board available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This transfer board is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCarrying capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.65 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Rolko","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849250379,"sku":"TW-TRNSFRBRD","price":119.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/b94b590c-e674b4_d3c956b4f23e4c4a8f592148b47fe3f7_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"medi-soft-firm-ring-cushion","title":"Medi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMedi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMedi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e is a moulded firm ring cushion with a central opening, supplied with a removable cotton cover and carry bag. Its 440 mm outside diameter provides a broad seated support surface, while the 120 mm centre opening reduces direct contact beneath the central area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFirm or Soft Ring Cushion?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose this \u003cstrong\u003eFirm Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e when a more supportive, structured feel is preferred. The \u003cstrong\u003eMedi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e uses softer eggshell-style foam and sits slightly higher at approximately 80 mm. Both have a 440 mm outside diameter and 120 mm central opening, so the main choice is the feel and support level rather than overall footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFirm moulded ring cushion.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e440 mm outside diameter\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e120 mm inside opening\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e70 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemovable cotton cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCover is machine washable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCarry bag included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePortable for home, office or travel use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePressure-Care Note\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRing cushions can change where pressure is concentrated while sitting. For users with an existing pressure injury, fragile skin or high pressure-injury risk, cushion choice should be guided by an appropriate healthcare professional rather than relying on shape alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMedi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the outside diameter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 440 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow large is the centre opening?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 120 mm in diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 70 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this the firmer Medi-Soft ring cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This model is the moulded firm ring cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference from the Medi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis version has a firmer moulded feel and is approximately 70 mm high. The Foam Ring Cushion is softer and approximately 80 mm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a removable cover?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A removable cotton cover is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the cover be machine washed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The current product information specifies a machine-washable cover.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a carry bag?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A carry bag is supplied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly where the cushion is stable, fits the seat and does not interfere with posture or wheelchair dimensions. A purpose-designed wheelchair cushion may be more appropriate for ongoing pressure care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it prevent pressure injuries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo cushion can guarantee prevention. Users at pressure-injury risk should have their seating needs assessed appropriately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used after surgery?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may be considered when a clinician recommends this style of support, but suitability depends on the procedure and individual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the cushion be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the supplied care instructions and avoid methods that could damage the moulded cushion. The removable cotton cover can be cleaned separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOutside diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInside diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable cotton, machine washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIncluded\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarry bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Medi-Soft","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849315915,"sku":"CUB-MEDIRINGFIRM","price":95.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/49bf941c-e674b4_e66737f95b5f44c48f6bd8a7f824a0a6_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"medi-soft-foam-ring-cushion","title":"Medi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMedi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMedi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e is a soft oval ring cushion made from moulded eggshell-style foam and supplied with a cotton cover. Its central opening reduces direct contact beneath the middle of the seated area, while the soft foam provides a more forgiving feel than the firm Medi-Soft ring cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSoft or Firm Ring Cushion?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eFoam Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e when a softer, more forgiving feel is preferred. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/medi-soft-firm-ring-cushion\"\u003eMedi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e has a more structured moulded feel and sits slightly lower at approximately 70 mm. Both have a 440 mm outside diameter and 120 mm central opening, so the main difference is firmness and feel rather than overall footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft moulded eggshell-style foam.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOval ring design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e440 mm outside diameter\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e120 mm inside opening\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e80 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCotton cover included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight and portable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePressure-Care Note\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRing-shaped cushions alter the distribution of sitting pressure. They are not automatically suitable for every pressure-care need. Users with fragile skin, an existing wound or significant pressure-injury risk should seek professional seating advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMedi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the outside diameter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 440 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow large is the central opening?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 120 mm in diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 80 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the cushion made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA soft moulded eggshell-style foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it differ from the Firm Ring Cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis version is softer and approximately 80 mm high. The Firm Ring Cushion has a more structured moulded feel and is approximately 70 mm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a cover included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A cotton cover is supplied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for smaller users?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCubro describes this softer model as particularly suited to smaller people, although fit still depends on the chair and individual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a dining or office chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, if the chair seat is broad, flat and stable enough to support the cushion without overhang or movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly if it fits securely and is appropriate for the user's posture and pressure-care needs. A dedicated wheelchair cushion may be preferable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it prevent pressure injuries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo specific outcome is guaranteed. Cushion suitability should be assessed for users at pressure-injury risk.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used following surgery?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly if this style of support is appropriate for the procedure and the user's clinical advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRemove the cover for cleaning and follow the product care instructions so the foam is not damaged or saturated.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOutside diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInside diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft moulded eggshell-style foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCotton\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Medi-Soft","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849348683,"sku":"CUB-MEDIRINGSOFT","price":59.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/22df4fbd-e674b4_9c6fa694f46f4e878bf4b0595ee4a4a5_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"medi-soft-chair-cushion","title":"Medi-Soft Chair Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMedi-Soft Chair Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMedi-Soft Chair Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e uses temperature-sensitive Posture-Temp visco-memory foam to provide a soft, conforming seated surface. The foam warms and gradually moulds to the user's shape, increasing contact area for medium pressure redistribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePosture-Temp open-cell visco-memory foam.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e400 mm wide x 450 mm deep x 75 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft temperature-responsive feel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMedium pressure redistribution.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo-way stretch breathable cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWater-resistant\/waterproof care-cover construction as specified for the current product family.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStain-resistant and fire-resistant cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnti-allergenic and antimicrobial properties.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for compatible chairs with enough seat area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhen to Choose the Medi-Soft Chair Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the straightforward single-size option in the range. It suits users who want a soft, temperature-responsive memory-foam cushion in a common 400 x 450 mm footprint. If you need a larger 450 x 510 mm option, or want to choose between two seat sizes, the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/posture-temp-pressure-relieving-cushion\"\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e offers both 400 x 450 mm and 450 x 510 mm versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePressure-Care Note\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis cushion can support pressure redistribution but is not a substitute for individual assessment where a person has a pressure injury, fragile skin or higher pressure-care risk.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMedi-Soft Chair Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the cushion dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 400 mm wide x 450 mm deep x 75 mm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of foam is used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTemperature-sensitive Posture-Temp open-cell visco-memory foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the foam feel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt starts supportive and gradually softens with body warmth, conforming more closely to the user's shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat level of pressure support does it provide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current product information describes medium pressure reduction\/redistribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is this different from the Posture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Medi-Soft Chair Cushion is the simpler single-size 400 x 450 x 75 mm option. The Posture-Temp cushion is available in two sizes, including a larger 450 x 510 mm version.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cover breathable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cover is designed to be breathable while providing a care-friendly protective surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the cover stretch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The two-way stretch construction helps the cover move with the cushion and reduce surface friction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for allergy-sensitive users?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion and cover are described as hypo-allergenic\/dust-mite resistant and antimicrobial, though individual sensitivities vary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on an office chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, if the chair provides a stable base large enough for the 400 x 450 mm cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may fit some wheelchairs, but wheelchair seating requires correct dimensions and posture support. Confirm suitability where ongoing wheelchair use is intended.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it prevent pressure injuries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo cushion can guarantee prevention. Users at elevated risk should have their seating and repositioning needs assessed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the cover be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the current care instructions for the cover material and avoid cleaning methods that could damage the foam or protective coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow thick is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 75 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 x 450 x 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFoam\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTemperature-sensitive visco-memory foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePressure support\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium pressure redistribution\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo-way stretch, breathable protective cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Medi-Soft","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849381451,"sku":"CUB-MEDISFTPRESCUSH","price":99.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/2c50b59c-e674b4_c193a05177cf46eca7cd6eb34bd71a99_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"posture-temp-pressure-relieving-cushion","title":"Posture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e uses temperature-sensitive, open-cell visco-memory foam that gradually conforms to the user while seated. This increases the contact area between the body and cushion to support medium-level pressure redistribution and everyday seated comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the Right Size\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart offers two versions: \u003cstrong\u003e400 x 450 x 75 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e450 x 510 x 75 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Choose the size that sits fully and securely on the chair base without overhang, while matching the user's seating width and depth. The larger version is useful where a broader or deeper seat surface is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePosture-Temp or Medi-Soft?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth use temperature-responsive visco-memory foam for medium pressure redistribution. The \u003cstrong\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e is the more size-flexible option, with two available footprints and a bi-elastic protective cover. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/medi-soft-chair-cushion\"\u003eMedi-Soft Chair Cushion\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is the simpler single-size 400 x 450 x 75 mm option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTemperature-sensitive visco-memory foam.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen-cell foam construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMedium pressure redistribution.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo current sizes: \u003cstrong\u003e400 x 450 x 75 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e450 x 510 x 75 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBi-elastic, two-way stretch cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBreathable and waterproof cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStain-resistant and fire-resistant cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnti-allergenic and antimicrobial properties.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for compatible chairs with a stable, adequately sized seat base.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePressure-Care Note\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion is designed to support pressure redistribution, but no cushion can guarantee prevention or treatment of pressure injuries. Users with fragile skin, existing pressure damage or higher clinical risk should have their seating needs assessed appropriately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat sizes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart offers 400 x 450 x 75 mm and 450 x 510 x 75 mm variants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I choose between the two sizes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMatch the cushion to the user's seating dimensions and make sure it sits fully on the chair base without overhang or instability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of foam is used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTemperature-sensitive open-cell visco-memory foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the foam respond while sitting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBody warmth gradually softens the foam so it conforms more closely to the user's shape and increases the supported contact area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat level of pressure support does it provide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe product is described as providing medium-level pressure redistribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is this different from the Medi-Soft Chair Cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Posture-Temp cushion is available in two sizes and uses a bi-elastic protective cover. The Medi-Soft Chair Cushion is a single-size 400 x 450 x 75 mm option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cover waterproof?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The protective cover is waterproof while also being designed to remain breathable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the cover stretch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The bi-elastic two-way stretch construction allows the cover to move with the cushion and user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it stain resistant?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cover is specified as stain resistant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may suit some wheelchairs if the dimensions, posture and seating setup are appropriate. For long-term wheelchair use or higher pressure-care needs, professional seating advice may be appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on an office or dining chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the chair offers a stable base large enough to support the cushion without overhang or movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it prevent pressure injuries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo specific outcome is guaranteed. Pressure care depends on the user's condition, seating, repositioning and broader care plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow thick is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth current sizes are approximately 75 mm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSmall\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLarge\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDepth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e510 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFoam\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eTemperature-sensitive open-cell visco-memory foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePressure support\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eMedium pressure redistribution\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eBi-elastic, breathable, waterproof, stain-resistant and fire-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Posture-Temp","offers":[{"title":"W 450mm D 510mm H 75mm","offer_id":41676849414219,"sku":"CUB-PTPRESCUSH450","price":219.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"W 400mm D 450mm H 75mm","offer_id":41676849446987,"sku":"CUB-PTPRESCUSH400","price":199.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/4e19a355-e674b4_e5764eedae90433f9eb07dc08e1b02f6_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"leg-lifter-strap","title":"Leg Lifter Strap","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLeg Lifter Strap\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eLeg Lifter Strap\u003c\/strong\u003e is a simple manual positioning aid designed to help guide a leg during everyday movements such as getting into or out of bed, moving the foot toward a wheelchair footplate or repositioning the leg onto a footstool. It measures approximately \u003cstrong\u003e99 cm \/ 39 inches long.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA hand or wrist loop at the upper end provides a larger point to hold while the reinforced lower loop supports the foot during a small controlled positioning movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen a Leg Lifter Can Help\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe strap can be useful when the leg is difficult to lift or guide through the last part of a movement but the user can still control the task safely. Common examples include bringing a leg onto the bed, repositioning it after sitting down or guiding the foot onto a wheelchair footplate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a positioning aid rather than a transfer device. The strap is not designed to lift the person's body weight, pull someone across a surface or replace a hoist, sling or hands-on assistance where those are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompact and Easy to Keep Nearby\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe narrow strap format makes the Leg Lifter easy to store beside the bed, in a mobility bag or with other dressing and transfer aids. There are no powered components or adjustments to manage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInspect the webbing, loops and internal core before use. Do not use the strap if the material is torn, the loop is damaged or the stiffened core has broken through the outer covering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApproximately 99 cm \/ 39 inches long\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand\/wrist loop for controlled positioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReinforced foot loop.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight and portable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManual, non-powered aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for leg positioning rather than body-weight lifting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long is the Leg Lifter Strap?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is approximately 99 cm, or 39 inches, long.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is it held?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe upper end includes a loop for the hand or wrist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow does the foot fit into it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lower reinforced loop is positioned around the foot so the user can guide the leg with the hand loop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it help with getting a leg onto a bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, where the user can safely control the movement and the leg lifter is appropriate for the task.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it help position a foot on a wheelchair footplate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt may help guide the leg toward the footplate when the user can do so safely from a stable seated position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it a transfer sling?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is not designed to lift a person's body weight or replace a hoist or transfer sling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a carer use it to pull a person?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is intended to guide the leg, not to drag or lift the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it powered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a manual positioning aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it portable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The narrow strap format is easy to store or carry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould it be inspected before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Check the loops, webbing and rigid core for damage before each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if moving the leg causes pain?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStop the movement and follow any mobility or rehabilitation advice that applies to the user rather than forcing the leg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Leg Lifter Strap available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. This positioning aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width: 99.9655%; height: 137.2px;\"\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eOverall length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eApproximately 99 cm \/ 39 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eUpper end\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eHand or wrist loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eLower end\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eReinforced foot loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003ePrimary use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eLeg positioning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eBody-weight lifting aid\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart Mobility Equipment ","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849643595,"sku":"MS-LEGLIFT","price":45.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/d26f90cf-e674b4_1b3e7f844ef7433bab55ef65ffd07e54_mv2.webp?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"viking-rehab-chair-height-adjustable","title":"Viking Rehab Chair - Height Adjustable","description":"\u003ch2\u003eViking Rehab Chair – Standard and Maxi Height-Adjustable Rehabilitation Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eViking Rehab Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e is a strong, straightforward rehabilitation and day chair designed for people who benefit from a supportive upright seat, padded arms and adjustable seat height. It is now available in a \u003cstrong\u003eStandard\u003c\/strong\u003e configuration and two wider \u003cstrong\u003eMaxi\u003c\/strong\u003e configurations, making it easier to choose the chair around the user’s seating width as well as the required safe working load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard model has a \u003cstrong\u003e200 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both Maxi models are rated to \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and provide substantially more room between the armrests. All versions retain the Viking’s simple stationary design, padded seating, durable vinyl upholstery and height-adjustable frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the Viking Rehab Chair Model That Fits the User\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaxi 550\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaxi 650\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e609S\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e609M550\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e609M650\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSafe working load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 445 x D 455 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 550 x D 455 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 650 x D 455 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480–650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e465–635 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e465–635 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth between arms\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 455 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e560 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e660 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBackrest height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 600 x D 590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 685 x D 615 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 785 x D 615 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 11 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 13.3 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 15 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Maxi model names relate to the wider seat configurations. When selecting a chair, compare the user’s seated width with both the \u003cstrong\u003eseat width\u003c\/strong\u003e and the \u003cstrong\u003espace between the arms\u003c\/strong\u003e; safe working load alone does not determine whether a chair will fit comfortably.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy a Height-Adjustable Rehab Chair Can Be Easier to Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSeat height makes a noticeable difference to everyday chair use. A low seat requires the user to lower further and generate more effort to stand again, while a seat set too high may leave the feet poorly supported. The Viking’s adjustable legs allow the chair to be set at a practical height for the individual rather than asking the user to adapt to a fixed household chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe padded armrests provide a defined place for the hands during sitting and standing. Combined with the firm frame and relatively upright seating position, this makes the Viking a useful alternative to deep lounge furniture for users who prefer a more supportive chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSupportive Seating Without Unnecessary Complexity\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Viking Rehab Chair is intentionally simple. It has an ergonomically curved backrest, padded seat and arms, but does not add powered lift, recline or multiple seat-position controls. Once the height has been set correctly, the chair provides a stable everyday seating position without additional mechanisms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard and Maxi versions differ in width, overall footprint, weight capacity and seat-height range. The Maxi 550 provides a 550 mm wide seat and 560 mm between the arms, while the Maxi 650 increases these to a 650 mm seat and 660 mm between the arms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eViking Rehab Chair or Viking Hilite?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eViking Rehab Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e when the priority is a stable padded chair with seat-height adjustment and a choice of Standard or wider Maxi configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/viking-hilite-rehab-chair-height-adjustable\"\u003eViking Hilite Rehab Chair\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e when the seating setup needs more adjustment. The Hilite adds adjustable seat depth and seat angle, a much taller contoured backrest with lumbar and neck support, and rear mobility wheels for repositioning the \u003cem\u003eunoccupied\u003c\/em\u003e chair. The Hilite is also available in Standard and Maxi sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStandard and Maxi configurations\u003c\/strong\u003e for different seating widths and capacities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e200 kg SWL\u003c\/strong\u003e on the Standard model.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e250 kg SWL\u003c\/strong\u003e on both Maxi models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable seat\u003c\/strong\u003e with model-specific adjustment ranges.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomically curved backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e for supportive upright seating.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePadded seat and armrests\u003c\/strong\u003e for everyday comfort.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDurable vinyl upholstery\u003c\/strong\u003e for straightforward cleaning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust powder-coated frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable as a supportive day chair for lounge, bedroom, dining-area and rehabilitation use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Viking_Rehab_Chair.pdf?v=1756722151\" title=\"Viking Rehab Chair Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eViking Rehab Chair Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Check Whether the Chair Will Fit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore choosing a rehab chair, compare the seat width, seat depth and arm spacing with a chair the user already sits comfortably in. The user should be able to sit back against the backrest without excessive pressure at the sides, while the thighs are supported without the front edge of the seat pressing into the back of the knees.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnce the chair is in place, the seat height should be adjusted evenly so the frame remains level and stable. The user should have appropriate foot contact and be able to sit and stand in a controlled way. If the correct setup is uncertain, a physiotherapist, occupational therapist or other rehabilitation professional can help with individual positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Viking Rehab Chair best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who want a stable, upright and height-adjustable day chair with padded arms and a firm frame. The wider Maxi models suit users who need additional seating space or the higher 250 kg safe working load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the safe working load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard Viking Rehab Chair is rated to \u003cstrong\u003e200 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both Maxi models are rated to \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat Maxi sizes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Maxi range includes a \u003cstrong\u003e550 mm seat\u003c\/strong\u003e with 560 mm between the arms and a \u003cstrong\u003e650 mm seat\u003c\/strong\u003e with 660 mm between the arms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat-height range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard model adjusts from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e480–650 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both Maxi models adjust from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e465–635 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat depth?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll three configurations have an approximately \u003cstrong\u003e455 mm seat depth\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this an electric lift chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Viking Rehab Chair is a stationary rehabilitation\/day chair with manually adjustable seat height. It has no powered lift or recline function.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between this and the Viking Hilite?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Viking Rehab Chair focuses on simple seat-height adjustment and stable everyday support. The Hilite adds adjustable seat depth and angle, a 700 mm high contoured backrest and rear repositioning wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the chair have wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Viking Rehab Chair is a stationary rehabilitation chair rather than a wheeled transport chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the vinyl upholstery be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse normal care appropriate for durable vinyl upholstery and follow the manufacturer’s cleaning instructions. Avoid products that could damage the upholstery or frame finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a manual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Rehab Chair manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Viking Rehab Chair available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Rehab Chair range is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Viking","offers":[{"title":"Standard","offer_id":43163304329291,"sku":"CUB-REHABCHR-1","price":699.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maxi 550","offer_id":43163304362059,"sku":"CUB-REHABCHR-2","price":1399.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maxi 650","offer_id":43163304394827,"sku":"CUB-REHABCHR-3","price":1499.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/931a6736-e674b4_d063a3dfec4d4a2f89eb42cf6f9dc64a_mv2.jpg?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"viking-hilite-rehab-chair-height-adjustable","title":"Viking Hilite Rehab Chair - Height Adjustable","description":"\u003ch2\u003eViking Hilite Rehab Chair – Standard and Maxi High-Back Rehabilitation Seating\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eViking Hilite Rehab Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e is Viking’s more configurable rehabilitation and day chair, designed for users who benefit from a supportive high back together with adjustable seat height, seat depth and seat angle. The range is available in a \u003cstrong\u003eStandard\u003c\/strong\u003e model and wider, higher-capacity \u003cstrong\u003eMaxi\u003c\/strong\u003e models, so the chair can be selected around both the user’s seating dimensions and required safe working load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard Hilite has a \u003cstrong\u003e200 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Maxi Hilite models increase this to \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and provide wider spacing between the armrests, with 600 mm and 650 mm options available. All versions retain the Hilite’s tall contoured backrest, padded seat and arms, adjustable seating position and rear wheels for repositioning the \u003cstrong\u003eunoccupied\u003c\/strong\u003e chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the Hilite Model That Fits the User\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaxi 600\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaxi 650\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610S\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610M600\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610M650\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSafe working load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400–550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480–580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480–580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480–520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430–580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430–580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth between arms\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBackrest height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 690 x D 700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 800 x D 700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 850 x D 700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 19.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 21 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 21.6 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Maxi number refers to the wider configuration rather than simply a higher weight rating. If fit is important, check the user’s seated width and the \u003cstrong\u003espace between the arms\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than choosing on safe working load alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMore Adjustment Than a Standard Day Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Hilite provides adjustable seat height, depth and angle so the chair can be set up around the individual rather than relying on a fixed household chair. Seat height influences foot contact and the effort required to sit and stand. Seat depth affects how much of the thighs are supported and how comfortably the user can sit back against the backrest. Seat angle provides another way to tailor the sitting position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard and Maxi Hilite models have different adjustment ranges, so use the comparison table above when fitting the chair. The Maxi models also offer a broader seat-depth adjustment range than the Standard Hilite.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHigh Contoured Backrest with Lumbar and Neck Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll Hilite models use an approximately \u003cstrong\u003e700 mm high contoured backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e shaped to provide support through the back, including lumbar and neck support. This makes the Hilite a useful option when a conventional lower-back rehab chair does not provide the preferred level of upper-body support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor a simpler chair focused primarily on height adjustment, see the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/viking-rehab-chair-height-adjustable\"\u003eViking Rehab Chair\u003c\/a\u003e, which is also available in Standard and wider Maxi configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eRear Mobility Wheels Make the Empty Chair Easier to Reposition\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSmall mobility wheels are fitted at the rear of the Hilite. By tilting the chair back, a caregiver can roll the \u003cstrong\u003eunoccupied\u003c\/strong\u003e chair to a new position rather than lifting the full frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese wheels do not turn the Hilite into a transport chair. A person should not be pushed around while seated in it; the wheels are for repositioning the empty chair only.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhich Hilite Should I Choose?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eStandard Hilite\u003c\/strong\u003e when its approximately 520 mm arm spacing, 200 kg safe working load and lower 400–550 mm seat-height range suit the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose a \u003cstrong\u003eMaxi Hilite\u003c\/strong\u003e when greater seating width or the higher 250 kg safe working load is required. The Maxi 600 provides 600 mm between the arms, while the Maxi 650 increases this to 650 mm. The Maxi models also use a 480–580 mm seat-height range and 430–580 mm adjustable seat depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStandard and Maxi configurations\u003c\/strong\u003e to suit different seating widths and capacities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e200 kg SWL\u003c\/strong\u003e on the Standard model.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e250 kg SWL\u003c\/strong\u003e on both Maxi models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable seat height, depth and angle\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e700 mm high contoured backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e with lumbar and neck support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePadded seat, backrest and armrests\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRear mobility wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e for repositioning the unoccupied chair.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for supportive seating in dining rooms, lounges, bedrooms and rehabilitation environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Viking_Hiback_Rehab_Chair.pdf?v=1756722151\" title=\"Viking Hilite Rehab Chair Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eViking Hilite Rehab Chair Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Set Up the Hilite for the User\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart by checking seat width and overall chair clearance, then set the seat height so the user has appropriate foot contact and can sit and stand in a controlled way. Seat depth should support the thighs while leaving comfortable clearance behind the knees. Seat angle can then be adjusted to suit the required sitting position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause the Hilite offers several interacting adjustments, users with more complex positioning or transfer needs may benefit from setup by an occupational therapist, physiotherapist or other rehabilitation professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Viking Hilite best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who want a supportive high-back rehabilitation or day chair and need more fitting options than seat-height adjustment alone. The Maxi versions provide additional width and a higher safe working load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the safe working load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard Hilite is rated to \u003cstrong\u003e200 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both Maxi Hilite models are rated to \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat Maxi widths are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Maxi range is available with \u003cstrong\u003e600 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003e650 mm between the armrests\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat-height range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard model adjusts from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e400–550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Maxi models adjust from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e480–580 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the seat depth be adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Standard model adjusts from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e480–520 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, while the Maxi models adjust from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e430–580 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the seat angle be changed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Hilite provides manual seat-angle adjustment so the sitting position can be tailored more closely to the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Hilite an electric lift recliner?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a manually adjustable rehabilitation\/day chair and has no powered lift or recline function.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Rear mobility wheels make it easier to reposition the chair while it is unoccupied. The Hilite is not a wheelchair or transport chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between the Hilite and Viking Rehab Chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Hilite adds adjustable seat depth and angle, a taller contoured backrest with lumbar and neck support, and rear repositioning wheels. The Viking Rehab Chair is a simpler, lower-back model focused mainly on seat-height adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a user manual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Hilite Rehab Chair manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Viking Hilite Rehab Chair available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Hilite Rehab Chair range is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Viking","offers":[{"title":"Standard","offer_id":43163309998155,"sku":"CUB-VKGHIREHAB-1","price":999.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maxi 550","offer_id":43163310030923,"sku":"CUB-VKGHIREHAB-2","price":1699.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maxi 650","offer_id":43163310063691,"sku":"CUB-VKGHIREHAB-3","price":1799.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/577eec6a-e674b4_abe6358da91948c79391e3cc96f2c92d_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"electric-lift-recliner-chair","title":"Goldfern Electric Dual Motor Lift Recliner Chair","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Dual Motor Electric Lift Recliner Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Dual Motor Electric Lift Recliner Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e is an everyday powered lift chair that combines sit-to-stand assistance with independent backrest and leg-rest adjustment. The twin-motor design allows the upper body and legs to be positioned separately, giving more flexibility than a linked single-motor recliner.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe chair supports users up to \u003cstrong\u003e150 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and has a seat approximately \u003cstrong\u003e440 mm wide\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e530 mm deep\u003c\/strong\u003e. MoveSmart offers Steel Grey, Sandstone and Denim upholstery options.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eIndependent Back and Leg Adjustment\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWith two motors, the backrest can recline without automatically raising the leg rest to the same degree, and the leg rest can be adjusted without forcing a matching backrest position. That makes it easier to find positions for reading, watching television, resting or simply changing posture during the day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePowered Lift Assistance\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe lift function raises and tilts the chair forward to assist the transition from sitting toward standing. It is intended to reduce the amount of effort needed to rise from the chair, but the user still needs an appropriate transfer plan and enough balance to stand safely once supported.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the Right Goldfern Lift Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis standard dual-motor chair is the more compact option in Goldfern's current lift-chair range. Its seat is approximately \u003cstrong\u003e440 mm wide\u003c\/strong\u003e and the chair measures around \u003cstrong\u003e765 mm overall\u003c\/strong\u003e. The \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Heavy Duty Dual Motor Lift Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e increases the seat width to about 545 mm and user capacity to 220 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSeat width, depth and height all affect how well a lift chair fits. A chair that is too deep can make it difficult to sit fully back while keeping the feet supported, while a chair that is too wide may provide less lateral support. MoveSmart can help compare the dimensions before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBattery Backup and Practical Home Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn external battery backup provides limited backup operation during a power outage when correctly maintained. The backrest can be removed for easier delivery and installation, and magazine pockets are fitted on both sides.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe extra-long hand-control cord allows the controller to be positioned on either side of the chair to suit the room layout and user preference.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDual-motor system\u003c\/strong\u003e for independent backrest and leg-rest adjustment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElectric lift function\u003c\/strong\u003e for sit-to-stand assistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e150 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e440 mm seat width\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e530 mm seat depth\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3M soil and stain inhibitor fabric protection\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel and wood frame construction\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExternal battery backup\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRemovable backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e for easier transport and installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMagazine pockets on both sides\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtra-long hand-control cord\u003c\/strong\u003e suitable for left- or right-side use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApproximately \u003cstrong\u003e174 cm long when fully reclined\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSteel Grey, Sandstone and Denim upholstery options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Lift_Chair_Installation_User_Manual_2.pdf?v=1756718430\" title=\"Goldfern Lift Chair Range (Standard and HD) Owners Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Electric Lift Chair Range (Standard and HD) Owners Manual\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is this Goldfern lift chair best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who want a standard-width dual-motor lift recliner with independent back and leg adjustment and a maximum user weight of 150 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Goldfern Heavy Duty Lift Chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Heavy Duty model has a wider seat and supports users up to 220 kg. This standard model is narrower and more compact.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does dual motor mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe backrest and leg rest can be adjusted independently rather than moving together as one linked mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the chair help with standing up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The powered lift function raises and tilts the chair forward to assist the transition from sitting toward standing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e150 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat width?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 440 mm between the armrests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat depth?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 530 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 490 mm in the normal seated position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow wide is the chair overall?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 765 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the chair weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 59 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow long is it when fully reclined?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 174 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens during a power outage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn external battery backup is included. Keep it maintained according to the chair instructions so backup operation is available when required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the backrest come off?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The removable backrest can make delivery and installation easier.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSteel Grey, Sandstone and Denim, subject to availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eActuator 12 months, remote 12 months and frame 24 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart can arrange delivery of lift chairs to customers across New Zealand. Get in touch if you would like help confirming chair size or delivery arrangements before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e530 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 mm inside arms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight to seat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e490 mm standard; 750 mm elevated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFloor-to-arm height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e620 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBack height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e665 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e765 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e59 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e615 x 725 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFully reclined length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 174 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent MoveSmart colours\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel Grey, Sandstone, Denim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActuator 12 months; remote 12 months; frame 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Steel Grey","offer_id":42093279674443,"sku":"GF-ELCLFTCHRD-4","price":1795.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Sandstone","offer_id":41716509442123,"sku":"GF-ELCLFTCHRD-2","price":1795.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Denim","offer_id":41716509474891,"sku":"GF-ELCLFTCHRD-3","price":1795.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Standard_Lift_Chair.png?v=1780697314"},{"product_id":"ergonomic-vegetable-peeler-no-grip-required","title":"Ergonomic Vegetable Peeler (no grip required)","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHand-Supported Ergonomic Vegetable Peeler\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic Vegetable Peeler\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed to make everyday peeling easier to control without relying on the narrow pinch grip used by a conventional straight-handled peeler. Instead, the tool sits across the hand with broad non-slip contact surfaces, while a stainless steel blade peels suitable fruit and vegetables.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis style can be useful for people who find gripping a slim utensil uncomfortable or tiring, including users with reduced hand strength, stiffness or limited dexterity. It does not make peeling completely grip-free — the user still needs enough hand control to position the tool safely — but it changes where and how the hand applies force.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Hand-Supported Shape Can Be Easier\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA traditional peeler is usually held between the fingers and palm, which can require sustained pinching while the wrist guides the blade. The broader ergonomic design spreads contact across more of the hand and can reduce reliance on a tight fingertip grip.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor many users, that makes the motion feel more natural when peeling common produce such as potatoes, carrots and apples. The exact benefit will depend on the person's hand function, preferred peeling direction and the size and shape of the food being prepared.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSimple Food Preparation Without Interchangeable Parts\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe peeler uses a fixed stainless steel blade, so there are no blade cartridges or small attachments to swap between uses. That keeps the tool simple to pick up, clean and store.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs with any sharp kitchen tool, use it on a stable work surface and keep fingers clear of the cutting edge. If the user has substantially reduced sensation or hand control, another preparation method or assistance may be safer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing Between MoveSmart Peeler Options\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose this \u003cstrong\u003ehand-supported ergonomic peeler\u003c\/strong\u003e when reducing reliance on a narrow handle is the main priority. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/easy-grip-vegetable-peeler-set\"\u003eEasy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is a better fit when you want three separate tools for peeling, grating and shredding with broader conventional-style handles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHand-supported ergonomic design\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to reduce reliance on a tight conventional peeler grip.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless steel peeling blade\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-slip finger and hand contact surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for common produce such as potatoes, carrots and apples.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact, lightweight kitchen aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo interchangeable blades or powered parts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require absolutely no grip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo hand tool is completely grip-free. The design is intended to reduce reliance on a tight pinch grip compared with a conventional narrow-handled peeler.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the blade made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStainless steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat foods can it peel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used with suitable fruit and vegetables such as potatoes, carrots and apples.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with wet hands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe non-slip contact surfaces are intended to improve control, but hands and the tool should still be kept as clean and dry as practical.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for left-handed users?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe hand-supported shape may suit either hand, subject to the user's preferred peeling direction and control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the blade sharp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Treat it as a normal kitchen blade and keep fingers clear of the cutting edge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used by someone with weak hands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may reduce the need for a narrow pinch grip, but the user still needs enough hand control to position the tool safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a scrub brush?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current listing is for the peeler itself; no additional cleaning-brush function should be assumed unless it is present on the supplied item.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is this different from the Easy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis model uses a hand-supported shape to reduce reliance on a narrow handle. The Easy Grip set provides three separate handled tools for peeling, grating and shredding.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWash using a method suitable for stainless steel and the handle material, then dry thoroughly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore it so the blade cannot be contacted accidentally.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Ergonomic Vegetable Peeler available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This kitchen aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHand-supported vegetable peeler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBlade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrip style\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBroad ergonomic hand support with non-slip contact areas\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInterchangeable blades\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850135115,"sku":"MS-ERGOVEGPEEL","price":15.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/4f6fdade-e674b4_108b17553a7346e9b00fb2d791349162_mv2.webp?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"easy-grip-vegetable-peeler-set","title":"Easy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set","description":"\u003ch2\u003eEasy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eEasy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set\u003c\/strong\u003e is a three-piece food-preparation set designed to make common peeling, grating and shredding tasks easier to manage with a broader, softer handle than many conventional kitchen utensils. Each tool uses a textured grip and stainless steel working edge, with colour-coded handles that make the three functions easy to tell apart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe set can be useful for anyone who prefers a larger gripping surface during food preparation, including people who find narrow kitchen-tool handles uncomfortable or awkward to control. It remains a set of sharp manual utensils, so the user still needs enough hand control and coordination to work safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThree Tools for Different Preparation Tasks\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRather than using one interchangeable head, the set includes three separate tools. Their working edges provide peeling, grating and shredding functions for suitable fruit and vegetables, so the user can select the tool that best matches the job.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe separate-tool format also keeps operation simple: there are no blades to change and no small parts to swap between tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Broader Handle Can Help\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMany ordinary peelers rely on a narrow handle that needs to be held firmly between the fingers and palm. The Easy Grip design provides a broader, textured contact area, which can feel easier to stabilise for users who prefer to spread the load across more of the hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt does not eliminate the need for grip or control, and suitability will vary from person to person. If the user has very limited hand function, reduced sensation or difficulty safely controlling sharp kitchen tools, another preparation method or assistance may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSimple Everyday Kitchen Aid\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe stainless steel working surfaces are suited to normal food-preparation use on compatible produce. After use, clean the tools promptly and dry them thoroughly so food residue does not remain around the blades or grating surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial note:\u003c\/strong\u003e the handle material is not confirmed as latex-free. Users who need to avoid latex should not assume this set is suitable without further confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-piece set\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeparate tools for peeling, grating and shredding suitable produce.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft textured easy-grip handles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStainless steel peeling and grating surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColour-coded handles help distinguish the tools.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo interchangeable blades or assembly required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact and lightweight.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan generally be held in either hand depending on the task and individual cutting edge.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many tools are included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThree separate tools are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat tasks can the set perform?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe set provides peeling, grating and shredding functions for suitable fruit and vegetables.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the working edges made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe peeling and grating surfaces are stainless steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat makes the handles easier to hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe handles use a broader soft-textured surface rather than the narrow hard handle found on many traditional peelers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the tools be used with either hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey can generally be held in either hand, although ease of use depends on the user, the task and the direction of the individual cutting edge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the tools latex-free?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eLatex-free status is not confirmed for the handle material, so do not rely on this set where latex avoidance is essential.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the blades sharp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The peeling and grating edges should be treated as sharp kitchen tools and handled carefully.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they be used on all foods?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Use each tool only on produce that is appropriate for its blade or grating surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need to change blades between functions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The set uses three separate tools, so there are no small interchangeable blades to remove or fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan someone with reduced hand strength use them?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe broader textured handles may be helpful for some users, but sufficient control is still required to use sharp kitchen tools safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the set be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eClean the tools promptly after use using a method appropriate for the stainless steel and handle materials, then dry them thoroughly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Easy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This kitchen aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSet size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFunctions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePeeling, grating and shredding\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWorking material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandles\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft textured easy-grip design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInterchangeable blades\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLatex-free status\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot confirmed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850397259,"sku":"MS-EGRPVEGPEEL","price":20.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/ad277f56-e674b4_db09571b01794779884aa58020d9c7bb_mv2.webp?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"360-rotating-car-seat-cushion","title":"360° Rotating Car Seat Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003e360° Rotating Car Seat Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e360° Rotating Car Seat Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e creates a padded swivelling surface on a suitable vehicle or household seat. Instead of having to twist the hips and trunk as much when turning to sit or stand, the user can rotate with the cushion through a full 360 degrees.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis can make getting in and out of a car feel more straightforward for people who find turning on a fixed seat awkward. The memory-foam cushion also adds a layer of padding, while the lightweight design makes it easy to move between suitable seats.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow It Can Help with Vehicle Transfers\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eCar seats often require the body to turn while the feet remain outside the vehicle. A rotating cushion can reduce how much of that turning has to come from the user's hips and torso by allowing the seated surface itself to rotate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion does not lift the user or replace transfer assistance where that is needed. Its role is simply to provide a smoother turning surface on a seat that is already broad, stable and suitable for the cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePortable for Home or Car Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause it does not require installation, the cushion can also be used on compatible dining chairs or other stable household seating. It is best on a reasonably flat seat with enough surface area to keep the cushion centred.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHighly contoured, narrow or strongly sloping seats may not provide a secure base. In a vehicle, always make sure the cushion does not interfere with the seatbelt, seat controls or driving position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e360° rotation\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMemory-foam cushioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft polyester cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePortable between suitable seats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be used on compatible vehicle, office or dining seats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo installation or powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to reduce the need for twisting on a fixed seat.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCheck the Seat Before Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe underlying seat must be broad, stable and shaped so the cushion can sit securely. Highly contoured, narrow or sloping seats may not provide a stable base.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does the cushion rotate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt rotates through 360 degrees.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is inside the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA memory foam core.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the cover made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current product uses a soft polyester cover.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a car?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the car seat provides a stable surface and the cushion does not interfere with seatbelt use or vehicle controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a dining chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, on a stable chair with enough flat seating area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on an office chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may be suitable, but avoid unstable rolling or swivelling chair setups where the combined movement could make transfers less controlled.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it lift the user?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It rotates only; it is not a lifting device.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it replace a transfer aid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. If a person needs more than a rotating surface for a safe transfer, another aid or assistance may be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the setup be tested first?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Check that the cushion remains centred and stable before relying on it during a transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it affect sitting height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cushion adds some height, which can alter leg position and available headroom in a vehicle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eClean the cover according to the material-care instructions and keep the rotating base free from debris.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the 360° Rotating Car Seat Cushion available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This rotating seat cushion is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRotation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e360°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCushion\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMemory foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolyester\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible vehicle and household seats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850430027,"sku":"MS-360ROTSEAT","price":55.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/d8dd15c6-e674b4_c8058cea1e1d4a51a06003b52ddd58f3_mv2.webp?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"car-exit-assist-handle","title":"Car Exit Assist Handle","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Car Exit Assist Handle\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Car Exit Assist Handle\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact vehicle transfer aid that creates an extra handhold beside the seat when getting into or out of a car. It inserts into a \u003cstrong\u003ecompatible exposed car-door striker\u003c\/strong\u003e when the door is open, giving the user a firmer point to push down on rather than relying only on the door, seat edge or another person.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt approximately \u003cstrong\u003e225 mm long\u003c\/strong\u003e with a \u003cstrong\u003e145 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is small enough to keep in the vehicle between trips. It also incorporates an \u003cstrong\u003eemergency glass-breaking tip\u003c\/strong\u003e and a \u003cstrong\u003econcealed seat-belt cutter\u003c\/strong\u003e, so it can remain accessible as part of the vehicle’s emergency equipment when not being used as a transfer aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWho Is This Car Transfer Aid Best Suited To?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis style of handle can be useful for people who can still stand and transfer but benefit from an additional stable handhold as they rise from or lower themselves into a vehicle seat. It may suit people with reduced leg strength, stiffness, balance concerns or limited confidence during vehicle transfers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe key consideration is \u003cstrong\u003evehicle compatibility\u003c\/strong\u003e. Door strikers differ in shape, orientation, position and surrounding trim. Before relying on the handle, check that it inserts fully, sits securely and gives the user a comfortable hand position without contacting or damaging the vehicle trim.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTemporary transfer handhold\u003c\/strong\u003e for getting into and out of a vehicle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFits a compatible exposed car-door striker\u003c\/strong\u003e with no permanent installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApproximately 225 mm overall length\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e145 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic handgrip\u003c\/strong\u003e for pushing down during a transfer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBuilt-in \u003cstrong\u003eemergency glass-breaking tip\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConcealed \u003cstrong\u003eseat-belt cutter\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact size for storage in the vehicle between uses.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUsing the Handle Safely\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOpen the vehicle door fully, insert the handle into the compatible exposed striker and confirm it is seated securely before putting body weight through it. The user should have a stable foot position and transfer in a controlled movement. Remove the handle before closing the vehicle door.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is an \u003cstrong\u003eadditional handhold rather than a lifting device\u003c\/strong\u003e. If a person needs substantial physical assistance, cannot bear weight safely, or has difficulty controlling the transfer, a different transfer solution or hands-on assistance may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/kZ25HhcuiKE?si=Qxqu30q-Ow-GxtZy\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the Car Exit Assist Handle attach to the vehicle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt inserts into a compatible exposed car-door striker while the door is open. It does not require screws, brackets or permanent installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit every vehicle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Door-striker shape, position and surrounding trim vary between vehicles. Check that the handle inserts fully and sits securely before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho may find this type of car handle useful?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can suit people who are still able to transfer but benefit from an extra handhold when standing from or lowering into a vehicle seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow long is the handle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe overall length is approximately 225 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum user weight is 145 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have an emergency glass breaker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. An emergency glass-breaking tip is built into the tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a seat-belt cutter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A concealed seat-belt cutter is included as an emergency feature.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the handle remain fitted while driving?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Remove it from the door striker after the transfer and before closing the vehicle door.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on either side of a vehicle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may be used at a compatible striker on the side that suits the transfer, provided the striker shape, position and surrounding vehicle layout allow secure use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I check before each use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck that the handle and striker are undamaged, the tool seats securely, the surrounding trim does not interfere and the user can reach the grip comfortably.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the handle lift the user out of the car?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It provides a handhold to push against during a transfer; it does not mechanically lift the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a replacement for assistance when a transfer is unsafe?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. If the person cannot transfer safely with the available supports, appropriate assistance or a different transfer aid should be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere should it be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep it somewhere accessible in the vehicle, such as a secure door pocket or storage compartment, where it will not become a loose obstruction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Car Exit Assist Handle available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Car Exit Assist Handle is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVehicle transfer handhold and emergency tool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 225 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e145 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eVehicle connection\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible exposed car-door striker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInstallation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTemporary; no permanent fitting required\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eEmergency features\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass-breaking tip and concealed seat-belt cutter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact for in-vehicle storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676852527179,"sku":"GF-CARDOORAST","price":35.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/5398fcd9-e674b4_f7e8d1c5719541a78dfd4e219e1ec4e3_mv2.png?v=1754901815"},{"product_id":"lift-chair-protector-pad","title":"Lift Chair Protector Pad","description":"\u003ch2\u003eReusable Protection for Lift Chair Upholstery\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Lift Chair Protector Pad\u003c\/strong\u003e helps protect a lift chair from spills, moisture and everyday wear. Its five-layer leak-proof construction creates a protective barrier while the quilted surface adds comfort for regular sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe protector is machine washable for convenient reuse and is designed for straightforward installation on a lift chair. It is available in Navy, Mocha and Gray to coordinate with different chair colours and home interiors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive-layer leak-proof construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHelps protect against spills and moisture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eComfortable quilted sitting surface.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine washable and reusable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for easy installation on a lift chair.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable in Navy, Mocha and Gray.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Lift Chair Protector Pad?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA removable protector can help reduce direct contact between spills or moisture and the chair upholstery, while being much easier to wash than the chair itself. Goldfern combines that practical protection with a quilted surface intended for everyday comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eProtecting the Chair During Everyday Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lift Chair Protector Pad provides a removable layer between the user and the chair upholstery, helping manage minor spills and everyday wear without permanently changing the chair. Position it so the seat and back sections lie flat and do not bunch beneath the user or obstruct the chair’s moving sections.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the pad after the chair has moved through its full lift and recline cycle, and adjust it if it has shifted. Follow the care label when washing and allow it to dry fully before reuse. For ongoing continence needs, combine the protector with an appropriate personal-care plan rather than relying on chair protection alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the protector help guard against?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed to help protect lift chair upholstery from spills, moisture and normal everyday wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many protective layers does it have?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern specifies a five-layer leak-proof design.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the protector machine washable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is machine washable for convenient cleaning and reuse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a quilted surface?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The top surface is quilted to add comfort during everyday sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe MoveSmart variants are Navy, Mocha and Gray.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the pad itself a lift chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a removable protective pad for a lift chair; it does not contain any lifting or reclining mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it stop every possible leak?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern describes the construction as leak-proof, but prompt cleaning and correct placement are still important, particularly with larger spills or repeated moisture exposure.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it reusable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The pad is intended to be washed and reused.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it difficult to install?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern describes the protector as easy to install. Make sure it is positioned smoothly and does not interfere with the chair's moving parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFive-layer design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProtection\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLeak-proof barrier\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSurface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQuilted\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCare\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColours\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNavy, Mocha, Gray\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Navy","offer_id":41676853018699,"sku":"GF-LFTCHRPAD-N","price":65.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Mocha","offer_id":41676853051467,"sku":"GF-LFTCHRPAD-M","price":65.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Gray","offer_id":41676853084235,"sku":"GF-LFTCHRPAD-G","price":65.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/04f1432a-e674b4_22f0dc45b61d4e258e0c82cfe641abc4_mv2.png?v=1754901815"},{"product_id":"easy-grip-button-hook-aid-with-non-slip-handle","title":"Easy-Grip Button Hook Aid With Non-Slip Handle","description":"\u003ch2\u003eEasy-Grip Button Hook Aid with Zipper Pull\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eEasy-Grip Button Hook Aid\u003c\/strong\u003e is a two-ended dressing tool designed to make small clothing fasteners easier to manage. One end uses a wire loop to help draw compatible buttons through their buttonholes, while the opposite end includes a small hook for suitable zipper pull tabs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA broad ribbed non-slip handle gives the user a larger surface to hold than a small button or zip tab. This can be useful when fine finger movements, pinch grip or dexterity make ordinary fastening difficult, while keeping the tool completely manual and straightforward to use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo Dressing Functions in One Handle\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe button-hook end is used by passing the wire loop through the buttonhole, catching the button and gently drawing it back through. The zipper end can engage a compatible pull tab so the user can move the zip using the larger handle instead of gripping the small tab directly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause buttons, buttonholes and zipper tabs vary considerably, the tool will not suit every garment. It works best where the wire loop or hook can engage the fastener without forcing delicate fabric or placing excessive strain on the clothing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy a Larger Handle Can Be Easier to Manage\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFastening clothing often requires a precise pinch between the fingertips. The Easy-Grip handle increases the size of the contact area and provides a textured surface, which can make the action more manageable for users who find small fasteners awkward.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tool does not remove the need for hand control altogether. Some users may also find it easier to use when the garment is supported against the body or another stable surface rather than held loosely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUseful for Everyday Dressing\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe compact design makes the button hook easy to keep with other dressing aids or take when travelling. It requires no batteries, setup or assembly. Before use, check that the wire loop and zipper hook are straight, secure and free from damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo-in-one dressing aid\u003c\/strong\u003e with button hook and zipper pull.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSteel wire loop for compatible buttons and buttonholes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmall hook for suitable zipper pull tabs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBroad ribbed non-slip handle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReduces reliance on directly pinching small fasteners.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight manual design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo batteries or assembly required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for many shirts, trousers, jackets and other compatible garments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the button hook do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wire loop passes through a buttonhole, catches the button and helps draw it back through the hole.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the zipper hook used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe small hook can engage a compatible zipper pull tab so the larger handle can be used to move the zip.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it work with every button?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Button size, shape, spacing and buttonhole size vary. It works best where the wire loop can pass through the buttonhole without forcing the fabric.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it work with every zipper?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The zipper tab needs an opening or shape that the hook can engage securely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy is the handle easier to hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides a broad ribbed non-slip surface rather than requiring the user to pinch a small button or zipper tab directly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with one hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSome users may be able to use it one-handed depending on the garment, their dexterity and how the clothing is positioned.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it damage fabric?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt should be used gently. Stop if the wire catches or places excessive tension on delicate fabric.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for very small decorative buttons?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompatibility depends on the buttonhole and wire-loop clearance, so very small or tightly fitted fasteners may not suit the tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require batteries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is completely manual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the wire loop be checked before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Do not use the tool if the wire is bent, damaged or loose in the handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore it where the wire loop and zipper hook will not be bent or snagged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Easy-Grip Button Hook Aid available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This dressing aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFunctions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eButton hook and zipper pull\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBroad ribbed non-slip grip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eButton end\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wire loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eZipper end\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall pull hook for compatible tabs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAssembly required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676855443531,"sku":"MS-BTNZIPHLP","price":20.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/c711b13d-e674b4_5071a21083ed42e2a4fc5cee294f08fd_mv2.webp?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"ergonomic-can-ring-pull-helper","title":"Ergonomic Can Ring-Pull Helper","description":"\u003ch2\u003eErgonomic Can Ring-Pull Helper\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic Can Ring-Pull Helper\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact kitchen aid designed to make compatible ring-pull cans easier to open without relying on a fingertip or fingernail to lift a stiff metal tab. The tool engages the ring pull and gives the user a broader handle and lever point for the opening movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis can be useful for people who find small metal tabs awkward to pinch, lift or hook directly. The broad non-slip handle spreads the contact area across more of the hand, while the manual lever action helps convert a relatively small hand movement into upward force on the tab.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eDesigned Specifically for Ring-Pull Cans\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis tool is intended for cans with a suitable ring-pull tab. It is not a cutting can opener and will not open conventional sealed cans that do not have a compatible pull ring.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eRing tabs vary in size, shape and clearance from the lid, so universal fit cannot be guaranteed. If the helper does not engage the tab cleanly, avoid forcing it and use another safe opening method.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Larger Handle Can Help\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOpening a can by hand often involves getting a nail under the tab and then maintaining a precise pinch as the ring lifts. The Ring-Pull Helper replaces much of that small-finger action with a larger gripping surface and a levering movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe user still needs enough control to position the tool securely and manage the opened can safely. Once a lid starts to open, exposed metal edges can be sharp and should be handled with care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSimple Everyday Kitchen Tool\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe helper requires no batteries, moving mechanisms or assembly. Its compact size makes it easy to keep in a utensil drawer, and a hanging hole provides another storage option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for compatible \u003cstrong\u003ering-pull can tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBroad ergonomic handle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-slip gripping surface.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManual lever-style lifting action.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReduces reliance on hooking a fingernail beneath the tab.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact everyday kitchen aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHanging hole for convenient storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo batteries or assembly required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the Ring-Pull Helper designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed to lift suitable ring-pull tabs on cans.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it reduce finger effort?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tool engages the tab and provides a larger handle and leverage point than using a fingertip alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit every ring-pull can?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo universal fit is guaranteed. Tab size, shape and clearance vary between cans.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it open ordinary sealed cans without ring pulls?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is not a substitute for a cutting can opener.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it also a jar opener?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product is intended for the ring-pull function. It should not be assumed to fit or safely open every jar or bottle cap.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require batteries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a completely manual lever tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy is the handle broad?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA broader handle provides more surface area to hold than a small metal ring tab and can reduce reliance on a precise fingertip pinch.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for reduced grip strength?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may make the opening action easier for some users, but sufficient hand control is still needed to position and lever the tool safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan children use it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOpening cans can expose sharp metal edges. Children should only use kitchen-opening tools with appropriate supervision.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould damaged tabs be forced?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. If a tab is bent, broken or unusually stiff, use another safe opening method rather than forcing the tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the hanging hole or keep it in a utensil drawer where it will remain clean and accessible.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Ergonomic Can Ring-Pull Helper available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This kitchen aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible ring-pull can tabs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBroad ergonomic non-slip design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOperation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual lever action\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCutting can opener\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHanging hole or utensil drawer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676855476299,"sku":"MS-CANOPN","price":15.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/4eb51e92-e674b4_29736c66e9754355a331a3210d5ab309_mv2.webp?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"3-piece-ergonomic-bottle-jar-opener-set","title":"3-Piece Ergonomic Bottle \u0026 Jar Opener Set","description":"\u003ch2\u003e3-Piece Ergonomic Bottle \u0026amp; Jar Opener Set\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e3-Piece Ergonomic Bottle \u0026amp; Jar Opener Set\u003c\/strong\u003e gives you three different tools for dealing with common twist lids and caps around the kitchen. Each opener uses a broad handle and high-grip contact surface to improve leverage, which can make everyday containers easier to manage when small, smooth lids are difficult to hold directly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eRather than relying on one universal shape, the set covers a range of compatible bottle caps, jar lids and smaller twist tops. That makes it useful as a general kitchen aid for people with reduced grip strength, hand stiffness or simply anyone who wants more leverage on stubborn lids.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Three Different Openers?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eJar and bottle lids vary widely in diameter, depth and surface texture. A tool that works well on a small bottle cap may not suit a larger jar lid, so having three different opening profiles gives you more chance of finding a secure fit before applying force.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe larger handles also spread the effort across more of the hand than gripping a lid with the fingertips alone. The tools still require some hand control and turning force, but they can reduce how tightly you need to pinch a lid directly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSimple, Compact Kitchen Aids\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere are no blades, batteries or moving mechanisms to maintain. The three tools are compact enough to keep together in a kitchen drawer and can be brought out as needed for compatible twist lids and caps.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-piece opener set\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDifferent opening profiles for a range of compatible lids and caps.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBroad contoured handles for improved leverage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-slip gripping surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManual leverage-based design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact for kitchen-drawer storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful where small smooth lids are difficult to grip directly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many openers are included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThree.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are they designed to open?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey are designed for compatible twist lids, bottle caps and jar lids that fit the individual opener profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill the set open every jar?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Lid size, shape, seal strength and surface texture vary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy use a larger handle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA broader handle can provide more leverage and contact area than gripping a small lid directly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the handles non-slip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The set uses high-grip contact surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the set use blades?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese are gripping and leverage tools, not cutting can openers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it open ring-pull cans?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse a ring-pull-specific aid where appropriate. This set is primarily for compatible lids and caps.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for users with reduced grip strength?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may make some lids easier to manage, although the user still needs enough control to hold and turn the tool safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan very tight vacuum-sealed jars still be difficult?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Some seals may require a vacuum-release tool or another suitable opening method.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the openers be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe or wash them using a mild method suitable for the handle materials, then dry before storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should they be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe compact tools can be kept together in a kitchen drawer or utensil container.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the 3-Piece Ergonomic Bottle \u0026amp; Jar Opener Set available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This opener set is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSet size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 openers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible bottle caps and jar lids\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrip\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContoured non-slip surfaces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOperation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual leverage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676855574603,"sku":"MS-BTLOPEN","price":30.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/71qBtoYo6sL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1756976835"},{"product_id":"mobility-steps","title":"Mobility Steps","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Mobility Steps for Safer Everyday Access\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Mobility Steps\u003c\/strong\u003e provide a stable raised platform for situations where a small change in level is difficult to manage. Their lightweight rust-free aluminium frame combines a non-slip foot mat with rubber feet, and the range includes options with or without a supporting handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThree configurations are available: \u003cstrong\u003eFixed Height without Handle\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eFixed Height with Handle\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable Height with Handle\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes it possible to choose a simple low step or a model with an additional handhold and greater platform height.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the Right Mobility Step\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe fixed-height models place the foot plate approximately \u003cstrong\u003e140 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e above the floor. Choose the version without a handle when a compact platform is all that is required, or the handled version when a handhold is useful while stepping up or down.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable handled model raises the platform to approximately \u003cstrong\u003e200–250 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Because that is a noticeably larger step, it is important to choose a height that matches the user's ability and the access problem being addressed rather than assuming a higher platform is automatically better.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStable Platform with a Large Foot Area\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe foot plate measures approximately \u003cstrong\u003e450 x 320 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving the user a defined standing area once they have stepped onto the platform. The non-slip mat increases underfoot grip, while rubber feet help the frame remain stable on a suitable level floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published maximum user weight is \u003cstrong\u003e159 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. The step should always sit level with all feet firmly on the floor before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUsing the Handle Safely\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe handled models provide a convenient handhold during the stepping movement, but the handle should not be confused with a permanently installed grab rail. The user still needs sufficient balance and stepping ability for the task, and the product should not be used where a more substantial transfer or access solution is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree configurations:\u003c\/strong\u003e fixed without handle, fixed with handle, and adjustable with handle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRust-free aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-slip foot mat\u003c\/strong\u003e across the standing platform.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-slip rubber feet\u003c\/strong\u003e for suitable level floors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e450 x 320 mm foot plate\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e140 mm fixed platform height\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e200–250 mm adjustable platform height\u003c\/strong\u003e on the adjustable model.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e159 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. 3.65 kg product weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat versions are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose fixed height without a handle, fixed height with a handle, or adjustable height with a handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high is the fixed-height step?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe fixed-height foot plate is approximately 140 mm from the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high is the adjustable model?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable handled model can be set from approximately 200 to 250 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size is the foot plate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe foot plate measures approximately 450 x 320 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published maximum user weight is 159 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo the steps have a non-slip surface?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The platform has a non-slip foot mat and the frame has non-slip rubber feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich model should I choose if I want a handhold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose either of the handled versions. The fixed model keeps the 140 mm step height, while the adjustable model provides a higher 200–250 mm platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a higher adjustable step always better?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. A higher step requires greater leg lift and balance. Choose the lowest practical height that solves the access problem and suits the user's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the handle be used like a fixed grab rail?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It provides a handhold as part of the step, but it is not a permanently mounted grab rail or a substitute for a more substantial transfer aid where one is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the frame suitable for bathroom use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe frame is rust-free aluminium, but any wet-area use still requires a suitable level surface. Keep the feet and floor clean and confirm the step is stable before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the product weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern lists a product weight of approximately 3.65 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I check before each use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMake sure the frame is level, all feet are firmly in contact with the floor, the non-slip surfaces are clean and intact, and any adjustable height points are securely engaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Goldfern Mobility Step available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Mobility Steps are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFoot plate\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e450 x 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFixed foot plate height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustable foot plate height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200–250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 3.65 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e159 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRust-free aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSurface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-slip foot mat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeet\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-slip rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Step without Handle Fixed Height","offer_id":41676855771211,"sku":"GF-STPNHFH","price":140.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Step with Handle Fixed Height","offer_id":41676855705675,"sku":"GF-STPHFH","price":160.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Step with Handle Adjustable Height","offer_id":41676855738443,"sku":"GF-STPHAH","price":220.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/b5227f5a-e674b4_247973d6d1014f5e87804a7ca4d5eae2_mv2.png?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"swivel-seat","title":"Swivel Seat","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Swivel Seat\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Swivel Seat\u003c\/strong\u003e is a portable rotating seat cushion designed to make turning on a suitable chair or vehicle seat easier. It provides smooth \u003cstrong\u003e360° rotation\u003c\/strong\u003e on a padded surface, helping reduce the amount of twisting required during an appropriate seated transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe seat has a published diameter of approximately \u003cstrong\u003e395 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, an overall height of approximately \u003cstrong\u003e50 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a maximum user weight of \u003cstrong\u003e120 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. Thick foam cushioning is covered in durable fabric, and a non-slip base is designed to help the cushion stay positioned on a suitable seat surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e360° swivel movement\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e395 mm seat diameter\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e50 mm overall height\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e120 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThick foam cushioning\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDurable fabric cover\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-slip base\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact and portable between suitable seating locations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12-month warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Swivel Seat?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Swivel Seat creates a rotating layer between the user and a suitable seat, so the body can turn with the cushion rather than relying entirely on twisting through the hips and trunk. It is important that the underlying seat is stable, broad enough for the cushion and appropriate for the user's transfer method.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMaking Everyday Tasks More Manageable\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSwivel Seat is designed to reduce unnecessary reaching, gripping or twisting during a familiar daily task. The most useful setup depends on the user’s hand strength, range of movement and the environment in which it will be used. Practise the movement while seated or otherwise well supported before relying on the aid during a full routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep handles and contact surfaces clean and dry, inspect moving or gripping parts regularly, and store the product where it can be reached without creating another awkward movement. An occupational therapist can suggest task-specific techniques or alternatives where pain, weakness or limited movement makes the activity difficult.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does the Swivel Seat rotate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed for smooth 360° rotation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat diameter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published seat diameter is approximately 395 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published overall height is approximately 50 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published maximum user weight is 120 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the cushion made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern specifies thick foam cushioning covered with durable fabric.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the non-slip base do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed to improve grip between the swivel cushion and a suitable underlying seat. It does not make every seat surface compatible, so stability should be checked before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a car?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the vehicle seat is broad, stable and shaped appropriately for the swivel cushion and the user's transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a household chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used on a suitable stable chair with enough flat seating area to support the cushion. Avoid unstable, narrow or highly contoured surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould I test the setup before a full transfer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Check that the cushion remains centred and stable on the seat and that the user can control the rotation before relying on it during a transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a lifting aid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The product assists with seated rotation; it does not lift the user or replace a suitable handhold or transfer assistance where those are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published warranty is 12 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Goldfern Swivel Seat available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Swivel Seat is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRotation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e360°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 395 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCushion\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThick foam with durable fabric cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-slip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856655947,"sku":"GF-SVLSEAT","price":65.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/be516c10-e674b4_2062ca3d9249435db094bc89da2ebc51_mv2.jpg?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"table-top-jar-opener","title":"Table Top Jar Opener","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMore Leverage for Stubborn Jar Lids\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Table Top Jar Opener\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed to make jar opening easier by helping stabilise the container while the lid is loosened. Instead of relying entirely on one hand to hold the jar and the other to twist, the tabletop design lets the user use body weight and the work surface to improve control and leverage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMade from durable lightweight plastic, it is a straightforward manual kitchen aid for people who find conventional jar opening difficult because of reduced grip strength, painful hands or limited dexterity.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Stabilising the Jar Can Help\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOpening a jar involves two separate jobs: holding the container firmly and generating enough twisting force at the lid. If the jar slips, even a strong lid grip can be ineffective. The Table Top Jar Opener is useful when stabilising the container is the main problem.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt should be used on a stable work surface and with jars that sit securely in the opener. Stop if the jar is cracked, unusually shaped or cannot be held safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhich Goldfern Opening Aid Should I Choose?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eTable Top Jar Opener\u003c\/strong\u003e when holding the jar securely is the main difficulty. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/jar-opener\"\u003eGoldfern Vacuum Seal Jar Opener\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e for pop-off lids where breaking the vacuum seal is the main problem, or choose \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/goldfern-gripmate-jar-and-bottle-opener-set\"\u003eGripMate\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e when you want a multi-piece solution for bottles, cans and different lid sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSimple Manual Operation\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo batteries, electrical power or blade mechanism are required. The opener is designed to reduce reliance on hand strength through positioning and leverage rather than cutting the lid or puncturing the jar.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHelps \u003cstrong\u003estabilise a jar on a tabletop\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUses body weight and positioning to improve leverage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to reduce reliance on strong hand grip.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDurable lightweight plastic\u003c\/strong\u003e construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact and portable for kitchen storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManual, non-powered design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the Table Top Jar Opener work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt helps stabilise the jar against the work surface so the user can concentrate on loosening the lid rather than gripping the container tightly at the same time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require a strong grip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed to reduce the amount of grip effort needed by improving jar stability and leverage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Vacuum Seal Jar Opener?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Table Top model stabilises the jar while the lid is loosened. The Vacuum Seal Jar Opener is a smaller hook-style tool for releasing compatible pop-off vacuum seals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it designed specifically for jars?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Goldfern's current product information describes it as a jar-opening aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it help people with reduced hand strength?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may make jar opening easier for users who struggle to hold a container firmly or create enough leverage with a normal two-hand grip.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is it made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern specifies durable lightweight plastic.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it need power or batteries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is completely manual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it cut the lid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It works by stabilising the jar and improving leverage rather than cutting or puncturing the lid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it open every jar size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo universal fit should be assumed. Jar diameter, shape and lid design vary, so the container needs to sit securely in the opener.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould it be used with a cracked or damaged jar?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Do not apply opening force to a cracked, chipped or otherwise damaged glass jar.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it easy to store?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its compact lightweight design is intended for straightforward kitchen storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhen should I choose GripMate instead?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGripMate is the more versatile option if you want tools for bottles, cans and several different lid sizes rather than a jar-focused tabletop aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Goldfern Table Top Jar Opener available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This kitchen aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop jar-opening aid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary function\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJar stabilisation and leverage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurable lightweight plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCutting mechanism\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856688715,"sku":"GF-TTPJO","price":30.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/c6066723-e674b4_18ec0385160c4bc9ad7f622fd42b3269_mv2.jpg?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"shoe-horn","title":"Shoe Horn - Long Handle, Flexible","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLong-Handle Flexible Shoe Horn for Easier Dressing\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Long-Handle Flexible Shoe Horn\u003c\/strong\u003e provides extra reach when putting on shoes, helping reduce how far the user needs to bend toward the feet. Its metal construction is paired with a flexible neck so the shoe horn can follow the angle of the heel and footwear more naturally than a rigid straight tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a simple everyday dressing aid for people who find reaching the feet awkward because of stiffness, limited mobility or a temporary movement restriction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy a Long Handle Can Help\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA conventional short shoe horn still requires the hand to reach close to the heel. The extended handle brings the working end of the shoe horn to the foot while the user's hand remains higher, which can make dressing more manageable from a seated position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe shoe should still be loosened enough for the foot to enter comfortably. A shoe horn is intended to guide the heel and protect the back of the shoe, not to force the foot into tight footwear.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFlexible Neck for Easier Positioning\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe flexible neck allows the lower section to move with the angle of the heel and shoe for easier positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse gentle pressure and avoid deliberately over-bending or twisting the flexible section beyond what is needed for normal shoe placement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSafer Everyday Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe shoe horn can be used while seated or standing, but sitting is generally the more stable option for anyone whose balance is uncertain. Make sure the foot is positioned securely and that the user does not need to reach or lean beyond a comfortable range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf the user has been given specific movement restrictions after surgery or injury, follow that advice even if the long handle makes additional reach possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtra-long handle\u003c\/strong\u003e for increased reach.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible neck\u003c\/strong\u003e to follow the angle of the heel and shoe.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetal shoe-horn section\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHelps reduce the amount of bending needed when putting on footwear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful from a stable seated position.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSimple manual dressing aid with no powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy is the handle extra long?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe extra length provides more reach, reducing how far the user needs to bend toward the feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the flexible neck do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt allows the shoe horn to move with the angle of the heel and footwear, which can make positioning easier.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho may find a long shoe horn useful?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may help people with reduced reach, stiffness or mobility who find bending down to put on shoes difficult.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used while seated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A stable seated position is often the easiest and safest way to use a long-handled shoe horn.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used while standing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used while standing if the user can maintain safe balance. If balance is uncertain, sitting is the better option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould shoes still be loosened first?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Loosening laces, straps or other fastenings helps the foot slide in more easily and reduces strain on both the shoe and shoe horn.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used to force a foot into a tight shoe?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The shoe horn should guide the heel rather than be used as a lever to force the foot into footwear that is too tight.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable after surgery?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may help reduce bending, but the user should follow any movement restrictions or dressing advice provided by their healthcare team.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the flexible neck be bent sharply for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvoid unnecessary over-bending. The flexible section is intended to assist normal positioning during use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this a powered device?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a simple manual dressing aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore it where the handle and flexible neck will not be crushed, sharply bent or damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Goldfern Long-Handle Flexible Shoe Horn available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This dressing aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLong-handle shoe horn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWorking section\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetal shoe horn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNeck\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexible\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHelping put on shoes with less bending toward the feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856754251,"sku":"GF-MTLSH","price":25.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/b57433e8-e674b4_5eb7df6b97834544824ef2d94c08788b_mv2.jpg?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"lumbar-support-cushion","title":"Lumbar Support Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eContoured Lower-Back Support for Everyday Sitting\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Lumbar Support Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e is shaped to support the natural curve of the lower back while sitting. Its contoured memory foam core provides comfortable support, while the breathable perforated fabric helps improve airflow during longer periods of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn adjustable strap helps keep the cushion positioned against the chair back. It is a practical option for office, home or other upright seating where extra lumbar support may improve sitting comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContoured design supports the natural lower-back curve.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMemory foam core.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBreathable perforated fabric.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdjustable securing strap.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for everyday seated lumbar support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for a variety of upright seating where the strap can be fitted securely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Lumbar Support Cushion?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion provides a simple way to add shaped lumbar support to an existing chair. Its memory foam construction adapts to the user, while the strap helps keep the cushion in the intended position. It may improve comfort for people who spend extended periods sitting, without making promises about treating pain or medical conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eLumbar Support Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat part of the back does this cushion support?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed primarily to support the lumbar area and the natural curve of the lower back.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the cushion made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern specifies a contoured memory foam cushion with breathable perforated fabric.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the memory foam mould to the user?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMemory foam responds to pressure and body warmth, allowing the cushion to conform to the seated user over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the adjustable strap do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe strap helps secure the cushion against the chair back so it stays in the intended lumbar position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on an office chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the chair back allows the strap to be fitted securely and the cushion sits comfortably at the lower back.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it on other chairs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may suit many upright chairs. Fit depends on the chair's back shape, width and the ability to secure the adjustable strap.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the fabric breathable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Goldfern specifies perforated breathable fabric to promote airflow.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes this cushion cure back pain or sciatica?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo such guarantee should be made. It is a support cushion intended to improve sitting support and comfort. Seek professional advice for persistent or significant back or nerve symptoms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere should I position the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePosition the contoured section so it comfortably supports the natural inward curve of your lower back rather than sitting too high on the spine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCore\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMemory foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShape\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContoured lumbar support\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFabric\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBreathable perforated fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRetention\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable strap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856721483,"sku":"GF-LMRCUSH","price":40.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/be8f7050-e674b4_fee119e8099b4d12b69b8f58637ca16f_mv2.jpg?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"lotion-or-gel-applicator","title":"Lotion or Gel Applicator","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Lotion or Gel Applicator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Lotion Applicator\u003c\/strong\u003e is a long-reach personal care aid designed to make it easier to apply body lotion or bath gel to hard-to-reach areas. Its rotating balls glide over the skin and release the liquid as the applicator moves, helping extend reach without requiring as much bending or twisting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWith an overall length of \u003cstrong\u003e455 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is a simple non-powered aid for everyday body care at home.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e455 mm overall length\u003c\/strong\u003e for extended reach.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRotating ball applicator head\u003c\/strong\u003e that glides over the skin while releasing liquid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for \u003cstrong\u003ebody lotion and bath gel\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful for reaching areas such as the back and other places that can be awkward to access by hand.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-powered design\u003c\/strong\u003e for straightforward everyday use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact daily-living aid for personal care routines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Lotion Applicator?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis applicator provides extra reach for everyday skin and bathing routines without adding powered components or complicated controls. The rotating-ball head is designed to distribute lotion or bath gel as it moves across the skin, while the 455 mm length helps reach areas that may otherwise be difficult to access.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMaking Everyday Tasks More Manageable\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eLotion or Gel Applicator is designed to reduce unnecessary reaching, gripping or twisting during a familiar daily task. The most useful setup depends on the user’s hand strength, range of movement and the environment in which it will be used. Practise the movement while seated or otherwise well supported before relying on the aid during a full routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep handles and contact surfaces clean and dry, inspect moving or gripping parts regularly, and store the product where it can be reached without creating another awkward movement. An occupational therapist can suggest task-specific techniques or alternatives where pain, weakness or limited movement makes the activity difficult.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the Goldfern Lotion Applicator designed to apply?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern specifically lists it for applying body lotion and bath gel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow long is the applicator?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe overall length is approximately 455 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the rotating-ball head work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs the balls rotate, they glide over the skin and release the liquid being applied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat areas can it help reach?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIts long handle is designed to help with hard-to-reach areas such as the back and other parts of the body that can be awkward to access by hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this a powered applicator?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a simple manual personal-care aid and does not require batteries or electricity.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it intended to be a massage device?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Its primary purpose is applying lotion or bath gel. The rotating balls are part of the liquid-application mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it with sunscreen or other creams?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern specifically lists body lotion and bath gel. For other products, check that their consistency and ingredients are suitable for the applicator before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it help if I find reaching my back difficult?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The 455 mm handle is designed to provide extra reach and may make routine body-care tasks easier.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for everyday home use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is designed as a straightforward daily-living aid for regular personal-care routines.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Lotion Applicator available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Lotion Applicator is available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLong-reach lotion and bath gel applicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e455 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eApplicator\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotating balls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePublished uses\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody lotion and bath gel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856787019,"sku":"GF-LTNGELAPP","price":25.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/b9c7f8d8-e674b4_bf5cb49aa1ad45b79af43f3a45200c68_mv2.jpg?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"sock-assist-tool","title":"Sock Assist Tool","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Sock Assist Tool\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Sock Assist Tool\u003c\/strong\u003e is a simple dressing aid for people who can manage their socks once they are on but find the initial reach down to the foot difficult. The sock is loaded over the soft covered section, lowered towards the foot using the \u003cstrong\u003elong fabric handle\u003c\/strong\u003e, then drawn on with less forward bending than putting a sock on by hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is particularly useful where reduced hip or knee movement, back stiffness, balance concerns or limited reach make lower-body dressing awkward. The design is lightweight and uncomplicated, making it a practical everyday option for someone who wants a little extra reach without a mechanical or rigid dressing device.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWho Is the Sock Assist Best Suited To?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis type of aid works best for a person who can sit safely, guide their foot into the loaded sock and pull the handle in a controlled way. It is intended to reduce the amount of bending and reaching required rather than completely remove the need for hand control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor very tight compression stockings or specialist medical hosiery, a dedicated stocking donner may be more appropriate. Sock thickness, elasticity, foot shape and the user’s hand function can all affect how easy the tool is to use, so everyday socks are the best starting point while learning the technique.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to help with \u003cstrong\u003eputting on everyday socks\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLong fabric handle\u003c\/strong\u003e provides extra reach towards the feet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft covered sock-support section\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHelps reduce the need for deep forward bending during dressing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePractical for use from a \u003cstrong\u003estable seated position\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight daily-living dressing aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo powered parts or complicated adjustment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact for storage at home or while travelling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Sock Assist\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eLoad the sock over the covered section with the opening held wide enough for the foot. While seated securely, lower the loaded aid to the floor, guide the foot into the sock and pull steadily on the fabric handle until the sock has moved over the foot. Finish positioning the sock by hand if required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe technique can take a few attempts to learn. Avoid forcing a sock that is too tight for the aid, and check the handle and covered section regularly for damage or loose stitching.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/Os2rXeExNQs?si=twlD09zRQfNH9fGp\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the Sock Assist Tool for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a dressing aid designed to help put on socks when reaching the feet is difficult.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it reduce bending?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe long fabric handle lets the user lower and pull the sock-support section from further away instead of reaching directly to the foot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is likely to benefit from it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be useful for people with limited reach, reduced hip or knee movement, back stiffness or difficulty bending forward during lower-body dressing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used while seated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A stable seated position is generally the most practical way to use it. Make sure the chair itself is secure before starting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a soft surface?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Goldfern describes the sock-support section as having a soft covering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it work with every sock?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNot necessarily. Sock thickness, elasticity, shape and foot size vary. Standard everyday socks are the most appropriate starting point.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it designed for compression stockings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is not specified as a dedicated compression-stocking donner. Very firm compression garments may require a purpose-designed aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it remove the need to use my hands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The tool reduces reaching, but the user still needs enough hand control to load the sock, guide the aid and pull the handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require assembly?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo complex assembly is required before normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a demonstration video?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The video above shows the general technique used with a sock-assist tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse a gentle cleaning method suitable for the fabric handle and soft covering, then allow the tool to dry fully before storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I check before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck that the fabric handle, stitching and covered sock-support section are secure and undamaged before pulling on them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep it clean and dry where the handle and covered section will not be crushed, snagged or damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Goldfern Sock Assist Tool available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Sock Assist Tool is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSock dressing aid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLong fabric handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSock-support surface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft covering\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHelping put on everyday socks with less reaching towards the feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical setup\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUsed from a stable seated position\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompression hosiery\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot specified as a dedicated compression-stocking donner\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856819787,"sku":"GF-SOCKAS","price":28.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/7f675332-e674b4_5f1c288f6a1a4b8eb0e7da3aca00d0a1_mv2.jpg?v=1754901823"},{"product_id":"jar-opener","title":"Jar Opener","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Vacuum Seal Jar Opener\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Jar Opener\u003c\/strong\u003e is a simple kitchen aid for pop-off jar lids. Its integral hook slips beneath the lid rim so a gentle lift can release the vacuum seal before the lid is removed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe flat, wide handle provides a larger surface to hold, reducing the amount of gripping and twisting needed compared with forcing a tightly sealed lid by hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhich Goldfern Opening Aid Should I Choose?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose this \u003cstrong\u003eVacuum Seal Jar Opener\u003c\/strong\u003e when the main problem is breaking the seal on pop-off lids. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/table-top-jar-opener\"\u003eTable Top Jar Opener\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e when you want the jar itself stabilised while loosening a lid, or choose the \u003cstrong\u003eGripMate\u003c\/strong\u003e set when you want a broader three-piece solution for jars, bottles and cans.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for vacuum-sealed pop-off lids.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegral hook fits beneath the lid rim.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlat, wide handle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDurable plastic construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact everyday kitchen aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Jar Opener?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt focuses on one task and keeps it simple: releasing the vacuum seal that makes many pop-off lids difficult to open. It can be particularly useful where hand strength or dexterity is reduced.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMaking Everyday Tasks More Manageable\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eJar Opener is designed to reduce unnecessary reaching, gripping or twisting during a familiar daily task. The most useful setup depends on the user’s hand strength, range of movement and the environment in which it will be used. Practise the movement while seated or otherwise well supported before relying on the aid during a full routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep handles and contact surfaces clean and dry, inspect moving or gripping parts regularly, and store the product where it can be reached without creating another awkward movement. An occupational therapist can suggest task-specific techniques or alternatives where pain, weakness or limited movement makes the activity difficult.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the jar opener work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePosition the hook under the rim of a pop-off lid and gently lift until the vacuum seal releases.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of lids is it designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed for vacuum-sealed pop-off lids.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it twist the lid open?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Its main job is to release the vacuum seal so the lid can then be removed more easily.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Table Top Jar Opener?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis tool releases the vacuum seal beneath a pop-off lid. The Table Top Jar Opener helps stabilise a jar so more leverage can be applied while loosening the lid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for screw caps?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is not a general screw-cap gripper. For multiple lid and bottle types, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/goldfern-gripmate-jar-and-bottle-opener-set\"\u003eGoldfern GripMate\u003c\/a\u003e set is the more versatile option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is it made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern specifies durable plastic construction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy is the handle wide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe flat, wide shape provides a larger area to hold and control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it help if my grip strength is reduced?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may make vacuum-sealed jars easier to manage because it reduces the need to force the seal by twisting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it complicated to use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a simple manual tool with no batteries, moving mechanism or setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this the same as the GripMate set?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This is a single vacuum-seal jar opener. GripMate is a multi-piece set for jars, bottles, cans and other lids.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856852555,"sku":"GF-JAROPNR","price":15.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/fb51c00d-e674b4_ff94541f325f4072aedf94007eda6b1f_mv2.jpg?v=1754901826"},{"product_id":"brush-and-comb-set","title":"Brush and Comb Set","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Long-Handled Brush and Comb Set\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Brush and Comb Set\u003c\/strong\u003e extends the reach of two everyday grooming tools so hair care requires less shoulder and arm movement. It can be useful for anyone who finds a standard short-handled brush or comb difficult to reach over the head or around the back of the hair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe set includes both a long-handled brush and a long-handled comb, allowing the user to keep a familiar grooming routine while changing only the amount of reach needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Long Handles Can Make Grooming Easier\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBrushing and combing normally require the arm to lift above shoulder height and move around the side and back of the head. An extended handle brings the grooming head farther away from the hand, reducing how far the shoulder needs to travel for the same task.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis can be useful for people with reduced shoulder movement, limited reach or temporary restrictions after an injury or procedure, provided any movement precautions are followed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSimple Tools for Independent Personal Care\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere are no powered parts or complicated adjustments. The brush and comb are separate tools, so the user can choose whichever suits their hair and normal routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor many people, that simplicity is the point: it is an everyday item made easier to reach rather than a specialised grooming system that requires learning a new technique.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncludes both a \u003cstrong\u003elong-handled brush and long-handled comb\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExtended reach can reduce the amount of overhead arm movement needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful for people with limited shoulder, arm or upper-body mobility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeparate brush and comb can be used independently.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight, non-powered daily-living aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for independent personal-care routines where appropriate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is included in the set?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe set includes one long-handled brush and one long-handled comb.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho can find the set useful?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be useful for anyone who finds reaching their hair difficult because of reduced shoulder, arm or upper-body movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy use a long-handled brush or comb?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eExtra reach can reduce how far the arm and shoulder need to move when grooming the hair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use either item separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The brush and comb are separate tools, so you can use whichever suits your normal grooming routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it help with independent grooming?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor some users, the longer handles can make it easier to reach the hair without assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it only for older people?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It can be useful for adults of different ages who have limited reach or shoulder movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used after an injury?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may be useful where reaching is temporarily difficult, but follow any movement restrictions or advice given by your healthcare professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should I clean the brush and comb?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRemove trapped hair regularly and clean gently using a method suitable for the materials. Allow the tools to dry fully before storage.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856885323,"sku":"GF-BCSET","price":40.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/99bffb5f-e674b4_204edaebd3024a95bb26a396cbf07239_mv2.png?v=1754901826"},{"product_id":"bed-backrest","title":"Bed Backrest","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Adjustable Bed Backrest\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Bed Backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e is a simple manual support for sitting more upright in an existing bed. It can be useful for reading, meals, watching television or resting when lying flat is uncomfortable or inconvenient, without requiring a powered adjustable bed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe backrest angle can be changed to suit the user, while a cushioned headrest adds support at the top. A metal frame provides the structure and the fabric surface is designed for straightforward everyday care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA Simple Alternative to Changing the Whole Bed\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor someone who only needs occasional upper-body elevation, a portable bed backrest can be a much simpler solution than replacing the bed with an electric profiling model. It sits on top of the mattress and can be adjusted or removed as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt does not raise the legs, change bed height or provide the multiple powered sections of a care bed, so it is best thought of as a sitting and reclining aid rather than a substitute for a medical or electric bed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable for Reading, Meals and Rest\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe inclination can be altered so the user is not limited to one fixed upright angle. A more upright position may suit eating or reading, while a lower angle can be used for relaxing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushioned headrest provides an additional contact point behind the head and neck. As with any support placed on a mattress, check that the backrest remains stable and that the mattress provides a suitable base before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable inclination\u003c\/strong\u003e for different sitting and reclining positions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCushioned headrest\u003c\/strong\u003e for added head and neck comfort.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDurable metal frame\u003c\/strong\u003e for dependable support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEasy-to-clean fabric\u003c\/strong\u003e for straightforward everyday care.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePortable, non-powered design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful for reading, meals, resting and other seated activities in bed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWho Is a Bed Backrest Best Suited To?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis type of support works well where the user can sit safely in bed but would benefit from something firmer and more adjustable behind the upper body than ordinary pillows.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf the person needs prescribed positioning, frequent repositioning, pressure-care management or powered assistance to change posture, a profiling care bed or professional seating assessment may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this an electric adjustable bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a manual bed backrest that sits on the bed to support the upper body.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the angle be adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The inclination can be adjusted so the backrest can be positioned for individual comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include head support?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A cushioned headrest is built in for added head and neck comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the frame made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe backrest uses a durable metal frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the fabric easy to care for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The fabric is designed to be easy to clean. Follow normal care precautions and avoid harsh cleaning products unless suitable for the material.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat activities is it useful for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can provide a more upright position for reading, eating, watching television, resting or other activities in bed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it replace a medical or electric bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is an accessory for added sitting support and does not provide the powered positioning functions of an adjustable care bed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on any mattress?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is intended for use on a bed, but mattress firmness, size and the user's support needs can affect suitability. Check that it sits securely before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for someone with specific clinical positioning needs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor prescribed positioning or significant medical needs, check with the relevant health professional that a bed backrest is appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676856918091,"sku":"GF-BBKRST","price":95.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/0c1e4b25-e674b4_aaf620e7b36142ef925e719d4c7c40d0_mv2.jpg?v=1754901826"},{"product_id":"deluxe-reacher","title":"Deluxe Reacher","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Deluxe Reacher\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Deluxe Reacher\u003c\/strong\u003e is a lightweight daily-living aid designed to help retrieve everyday items without the same amount of bending, stretching or overhead reaching. An \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic trigger grip\u003c\/strong\u003e operates the gripping end from the handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart currently offers two lengths: \u003cstrong\u003e60 cm (24 inch)\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e75 cm (30 inch)\u003c\/strong\u003e. The shorter version is compact for general household use, while the longer version provides additional reach where required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic trigger grip\u003c\/strong\u003e for hand-operated control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e60 cm \/ 24 inch\u003c\/strong\u003e option.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e75 cm \/ 30 inch\u003c\/strong\u003e option.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for picking up or retrieving \u003cstrong\u003elight everyday objects\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHelps reduce unnecessary bending and stretching during household tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight, straightforward daily-living design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful around the home, office or other everyday settings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Deluxe Reacher?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA reacher can make routine tasks simpler when an item is just beyond comfortable reach. Choosing between the 60 cm and 75 cm versions allows the tool to be matched to the user's preferred reach without adding unverified features or unnecessary complexity.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMaking Everyday Tasks More Manageable\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDeluxe Reacher is designed to reduce unnecessary reaching, gripping or twisting during a familiar daily task. The most useful setup depends on the user’s hand strength, range of movement and the environment in which it will be used. Practise the movement while seated or otherwise well supported before relying on the aid during a full routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep handles and contact surfaces clean and dry, inspect moving or gripping parts regularly, and store the product where it can be reached without creating another awkward movement. An occupational therapist can suggest task-specific techniques or alternatives where pain, weakness or limited movement makes the activity difficult.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the Deluxe Reacher used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is intended to help pick up or retrieve light everyday objects that would otherwise require bending, stretching or reaching further than is comfortable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat lengths are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart currently offers 60 cm (24 inch) and 75 cm (30 inch) variants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich length should I choose?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 60 cm version is more compact, while the 75 cm version gives additional reach. Choose the length that suits the user's height, usual tasks and storage needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the gripping end operated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe reacher uses an ergonomic trigger grip at the handle to operate the gripping end.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used from a seated position?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the item is within controlled reach and the user can operate the trigger comfortably without leaning into an unstable position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for heavy lifting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. A reacher is intended for light everyday objects, not heavy loads or items that could cause injury if dropped.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used as a walking or balance aid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Deluxe Reacher is not designed to support body weight and should never be used as a cane, rail or transfer support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould it be used to pick up hot or dangerous objects?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvoid using it for objects that are hot, sharp, fragile, chemically hazardous or otherwise unsafe to grip remotely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the trigger suitable for either hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe simple trigger-style design can generally be operated in either hand, subject to the user's grip and comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the reacher be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore it where the shaft will not be bent or crushed and where the gripping end cannot become damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould it be checked before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Confirm the trigger and gripping end operate smoothly and that the shaft is not damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it available throughout New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Both Goldfern Deluxe Reacher lengths are available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLength options\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 cm (24 inch); 75 cm (30 inch)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eControl\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic trigger grip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandheld reacher \/ daily-living aid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIntended loads\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight everyday objects\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"60cm\/24\"","offer_id":41676856950859,"sku":"GF-DLXREACHER60CM","price":40.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"75cm\/30\"","offer_id":41676856983627,"sku":"GF-DLXREACHER75CM","price":40.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/74129994-e674b4_13f125d3302848a8aafddb438b67a217_mv2.jpg?v=1754901826"},{"product_id":"gyenno-bravo-twist-spoon","title":"Gyenno Bravo Twist Spoon","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGYENNO Bravo Twist Stabilising Spoon \u0026amp; Fork\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGYENNO Bravo Twist\u003c\/strong\u003e is an electronic eating aid designed to reduce the effect of involuntary hand tremor on a spoon or fork during meals. Motion sensors and powered stabilisation respond to unwanted movement while the user guides the handle normally.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit includes interchangeable magnetic \u003cstrong\u003espoon and fork attachments\u003c\/strong\u003e. The fork also has a powered twist mode for winding suitable foods such as spaghetti. The rechargeable battery provides approximately \u003cstrong\u003ethree hours of continuous use\u003c\/strong\u003e, and the complete unit weighs about \u003cstrong\u003e150 g\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eElectronic real-time utensil stabilisation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to compensate for unwanted tremor movement within the device's operating range.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpoon and fork attachments included\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMagnetic attachment connection.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFork twist function\u003c\/strong\u003e for suitable pasta.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. three-hour battery life\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. 150 g net weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRechargeable main handle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharging cable and portable storage bag\/case included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOnly the removable utensil attachments should be washed with water; do not immerse the powered handle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSafety:\u003c\/strong\u003e Because the product contains magnetic components, users with pacemakers or other electrical stimulation devices should follow the product safety guidance and keep the device away from those implanted or worn electrical devices. The product is also not recommended where there is an allergy to the specified medical-rubber materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/CyJHsJTuJ7A?si=fMI-YCQuAcyfiXEE\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the GYENNO Bravo Twist?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bravo Twist is designed for people whose hand tremor makes ordinary cutlery difficult to control. It is an assistive dining device rather than a treatment for the underlying cause of tremor, and the amount of benefit will vary with the user's movement pattern and ability to hold the handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the Bravo Twist do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt electronically moves the utensil attachment to counter some unwanted hand tremor while the user eats.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it eliminate every tremor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is designed to reduce the effect of tremor within its operating range; individual results vary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat attachments are included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA spoon and fork attachment are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do the attachments connect?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey connect magnetically to the main handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the twist function?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWith the fork attachment fitted, the powered twist mode rotates the fork to help wind suitable foods such as spaghetti.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow long does the battery last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately three hours of continuous use on a full charge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does it weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 150 g.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it rechargeable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A charging cable is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the whole unit be washed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Wash only the removable utensil attachments as directed. Do not immerse the powered handle in water.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A portable storage bag\/case is included with the kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with either hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe stabilising handle is designed to accommodate normal eating grips and may suit either hand, depending on the individual user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it only for Parkinson's disease?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is an eating aid for suitable users with hand tremor; the underlying cause of tremor can vary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan someone with a pacemaker use it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe product contains magnetic components. Follow the manufacturer's safety warning and keep it away from pacemakers and other electrical stimulation devices; seek medical-device advice if compatibility is uncertain.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it treat tremor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is an assistive utensil and does not treat the underlying medical condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectronic stabilising eating aid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIncluded utensils\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpoon and fork\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttachment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMagnetic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecial function\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowered fork twist mode\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBattery life\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 3 hours continuous use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNet weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 150 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRechargeable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Gyenno","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676857049163,"sku":"GF-GYENNO","price":790.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/f0929d1a-e674b4_eb0a9d33a03a4f97b680c3ae6994a7c9_mv2.png?v=1754901826"},{"product_id":"dinner-set-and-cutlery","title":"Dinner Set and Cutlery","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Dinner Set and Cutlery\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Dinner Set and Cutlery\u003c\/strong\u003e range offers a practical adaptive dining setup for people who find ordinary mealtimes easier with a more contained plate and a stable place setting. The \u003cstrong\u003eFull Dinner Set\u003c\/strong\u003e includes a dinner plate with a plastic food spill guard, a non-slip placemat, knife, fork and spoon.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart also offers the \u003cstrong\u003eknife, fork and spoon individually\u003c\/strong\u003e, so a single utensil can be purchased without buying the complete set.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFull Dinner Set\u003c\/strong\u003e option for a coordinated place setting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDinner plate with \u003cstrong\u003eplastic food spill guard\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-slip placemat\u003c\/strong\u003e helps provide a more stable dining surface.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFull set includes \u003cstrong\u003eknife, fork and spoon\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife, fork and spoon also available as \u003cstrong\u003eindividual MoveSmart variants\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned as a practical \u003cstrong\u003edaily-living dining aid\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReusable components for everyday mealtimes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Dinner Set and Cutlery?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe full set brings several simple dining aids together: a raised spill-guard edge to help keep food on the plate, a non-slip placemat to reduce unwanted movement of the place setting, and matching cutlery. The separate utensil options are useful when only one piece is required or a component needs replacing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMaking Everyday Tasks More Manageable\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDinner Set and Cutlery is designed to reduce unnecessary reaching, gripping or twisting during a familiar daily task. The most useful setup depends on the user’s hand strength, range of movement and the environment in which it will be used. Practise the movement while seated or otherwise well supported before relying on the aid during a full routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep handles and contact surfaces clean and dry, inspect moving or gripping parts regularly, and store the product where it can be reached without creating another awkward movement. An occupational therapist can suggest task-specific techniques or alternatives where pain, weakness or limited movement makes the activity difficult.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is included in the Full Dinner Set?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current full set includes a dinner plate with plastic food spill guard, a non-slip placemat, knife, fork and spoon.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I buy the cutlery separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart currently offers separate Knife, Fork and Spoon variants as well as the Full Dinner Set.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the food spill guard do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt creates a raised barrier at the edge of the plate, helping keep food contained while it is moved toward the utensil.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the purpose of the non-slip placemat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe placemat is intended to provide a higher-grip surface under the place setting so dishes are less likely to move during normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the full set include all three main utensils?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Knife, fork and spoon are included in the Full Dinner Set.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the utensils weighted or bendable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current Goldfern product information does not specify weighted or bendable utensils, so those features are not represented as part of this listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the set suitable only for a particular medical condition?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo specific condition is required. It is a general daily-living dining aid for anyone who finds a spill guard, non-slip mat or separate adaptive dining setup useful.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I replace just one utensil?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The individual Knife, Fork and Spoon variants allow a single utensil to be purchased separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the set be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eClean the plate, spill guard, placemat and utensils after use using a mild method suitable for their materials. Avoid abrasive products that could damage the surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the set require assembly?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo complex assembly is required. Arrange the placemat, plate and chosen utensils for use at the table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the placemat be used with other dishes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used as a general non-slip dining surface where its size and material are suitable for the dish being used.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Dinner Set and Cutlery available NZ-wide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Dinner Set and individual cutlery options are available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOption\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eContents\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFull Dinner Set\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDinner plate with plastic food spill guard, non-slip placemat, knife, fork and spoon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFork\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndividual fork\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpoon\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndividual spoon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKnife\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndividual knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Full Dinner Set","offer_id":41676857180235,"sku":"GF-SGDS","price":80.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Fork","offer_id":41676857114699,"sku":"GF-SGF","price":25.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Spoon","offer_id":41676857147467,"sku":"GF-SGS","price":25.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Knife","offer_id":41676857213003,"sku":"GF-SGK","price":25.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/b0e07ac9-e674b4_9078fc6e99194b52af305448312bd038_mv2.jpg?v=1754901826"},{"product_id":"over-bed-table","title":"Split Top Over Bed Table","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Split Top Over Bed Table\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Split Top Over Bed Table\u003c\/strong\u003e provides an adjustable bedside surface for meals, reading, writing and other everyday activities. Its tabletop is divided into two sections: a \u003cstrong\u003esmaller fixed section\u003c\/strong\u003e that remains level and a \u003cstrong\u003elarger tilting section\u003c\/strong\u003e that can be angled to suit the task.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe frame is \u003cstrong\u003eheight adjustable from approximately 71–93 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e and folds flatter for storage when the table is not required. The split layout means a drink or small item can remain on the fixed section while the larger panel is tilted for reading or similar activities.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSplit-top design\u003c\/strong\u003e with one fixed and one tilting section.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight adjustable\u003c\/strong\u003e from approximately 71–93 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLarger tilting tabletop\u003c\/strong\u003e for reading, writing and other activities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSmaller fixed section\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a level surface alongside the tilting panel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall tabletop approximately \u003cstrong\u003e81.5 cm wide x 39.5 cm deep\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBase approximately \u003cstrong\u003e58.5 cm wide x 51 cm deep\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApproximately \u003cstrong\u003e54 cm between the base sides\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFoldable frame\u003c\/strong\u003e for more compact storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Overbed_Table_Manual_1.pdf?v=1756718427\" target=\"_blank\" title=\"Goldfern 2-Piece Over Bed Table Manual\"\u003eGoldfern 2-Piece Over Bed Table Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Split Top Over Bed Table?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe two-part tabletop is the main advantage of this design. The larger surface can be tilted to improve the working or reading angle while the smaller section stays horizontal for items that need a flat surface. The adjustable frame allows the table to be positioned around different beds or seating arrangements, subject to the available clearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlanning the Table Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSplit Top Over Bed Table is easier to use when the base, column and tabletop can reach the required position without interfering with the bed, chair or mobility equipment. Check under-bed or under-chair clearance, the usable height range and the direction from which the table will approach. The user should be able to sit comfortably without leaning or twisting to reach everyday items.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAllow room for castors and carers when moving the table, and lock it where the design provides brakes before placing drinks or equipment on the top. Keep loads within the published limit and distribute them evenly. Height or tilt adjustments should be made with care so loose objects cannot slide from the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the split tabletop work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tabletop has a smaller fixed section that remains level and a larger section that tilts.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy is a fixed section useful?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides a level area for items such as a cup, remote control or other small objects while the main panel is tilted.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat height range does the table have?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable height range is approximately 71–93 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the overall tabletop size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tabletop is approximately 81.5 cm wide and 39.5 cm deep.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the base size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe base is approximately 58.5 cm wide and 51 cm deep.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much space is there between the base sides?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current specification lists approximately 54 cm between the base sides.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the table fold for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The frame is designed to fold flatter when the table is not required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for meals?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It can provide a convenient meal surface when positioned safely and the tabletop section being used is level enough for the items placed on it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for reading or writing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The larger tilting section is particularly useful where an angled surface is preferred for reading, writing or similar activities.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use a laptop on the table?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA compatible lightweight laptop can be used if the tabletop is stable, the device sits securely and cables do not create a snag or trip hazard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the table be used to support body weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a work and meal surface, not a grab rail or transfer aid. Do not pull on it when standing or sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit every bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Bed-frame design, clearance and height vary. Compare the table and base dimensions with the intended bed before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there an instruction manual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern 2-Piece Over Bed Table Manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Goldfern Split Top Over Bed Table available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This over-bed table is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustable height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 71–93 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall table width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 81.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall table depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 39.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall base width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 58.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall base depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 51 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth between base sides\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 54 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTabletop\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmaller fixed section; larger tilting section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFoldable frame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676857770059,"sku":"GF-OBT-1","price":299.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/2c5e3c59-e674b4_518be6b7ac8b4454814ce42bfa2cdfd3_mv2.png?v=1757198463"},{"product_id":"folding-pedal-exerciser-with-pedometer","title":"Folding Pedal Exerciser with Pedometer","description":"\u003ch2\u003eCompact Pedal Exerciser for Seated Arm and Leg Exercise\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Folding Pedal Exerciser with Pedometer\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact exercise aid for gentle seated movement at home. It can be used on the floor for leg pedalling or on a stable tabletop for arm exercise, making it a versatile option for maintaining everyday activity.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe folding frame stores neatly when not in use, while the built-in pedometer provides activity feedback during exercise. A user and assembly manual is included online for correct setup and use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for seated leg or arm exercise.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBuilt-in pedometer for activity feedback.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFolding design for compact storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLow-impact pedalling movement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful for gentle home exercise and rehabilitation programmes when appropriate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Folding Pedal Exerciser?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis simple exerciser provides a convenient way to add gentle repetitive movement without needing a full-size exercise machine. Its dual arm-and-leg use and folding frame make it particularly practical where space is limited. If using it after surgery or as part of rehabilitation, follow advice from your treating health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuilding Movement Into a Seated Routine\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFolding Pedal Exerciser with Pedometer offers a compact way to perform gentle cycling movements from a stable chair, using either the legs or arms as appropriate. Position the unit so the user can maintain an upright posture without over-reaching, and choose a resistance that allows smooth, controlled movement rather than rocking or straining.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the exerciser on a level, non-slip surface and check that the chair remains secure. Start with short sessions and increase duration gradually according to comfort and ability. Anyone recovering from injury or managing significant joint, heart or balance concerns should seek suitable clinical advice before beginning a new exercise routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for both arms and legs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Place it securely on the floor for leg pedalling or on a stable suitable surface for arm exercise.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a pedometer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A built-in pedometer provides activity feedback during exercise.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it fold for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The frame folds down to reduce the space required between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a powered exercise machine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a manually operated pedal exerciser powered by the user's movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used while seated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is designed for seated exercise. Use a stable chair and position the exerciser securely before starting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for rehabilitation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used for gentle exercise and may form part of a rehabilitation programme when appropriate. After surgery or injury, follow the advice of your treating health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it after knee replacement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may be suitable for some rehabilitation programmes, but individual recovery requirements vary. Follow the exercise guidance provided by your surgeon or physiotherapist.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it improve circulation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRegular lower-limb movement is commonly used to encourage activity, but this product listing does not promise a medical outcome. Use the exerciser within your individual capabilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre instructions available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Pedal Exerciser user and assembly manual is linked below.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eExercise type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArm or leg pedalling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eActivity display\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in pedometer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFolding frame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Pedal_Exerciser_User_Assembly_Manual.pdf?v=1756718426\" title=\"Goldfern Pedal Exerciser Instructions\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eGoldfern Pedal Exerciser Instructions\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676857737291,"sku":"GF-FPE-1","price":95.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/d707bc03-e674b4_31b4b79d849c4f83bb06ef7c234361b1_mv2.png?v=1754901827"},{"product_id":"hull-easyreach-grabber","title":"Hull EasyReach Grabber","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHull® Easireach Grabber\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eHull® Easireach Grabber\u003c\/strong\u003e is a lightweight reaching aid designed to help retrieve light everyday objects without repeatedly bending to the floor or stretching as far toward higher surfaces. A smooth positive clamping action operates the jaw, while semicircular cut-outs in the upper gripping surface help the reacher locate around compatible objects.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart offers two lengths — \u003cstrong\u003eShort (650 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003eLong (820 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e — so users can choose between a more compact tool and additional reach. A magnetic tip can collect small ferrous metal objects such as some keys or pins, and a built-in clip allows the Easireach to attach to a compatible walking stick or walking frame for storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing Between the 650 mm and 820 mm Versions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e650 mm Short\u003c\/strong\u003e version is easier to handle in tighter spaces and may suit users who mainly need a modest extension for picking up objects from nearby surfaces. The \u003cstrong\u003e820 mm Long\u003c\/strong\u003e version adds approximately 170 mm of extra reach, which can be useful when reaching toward the floor or a shelf while keeping the body more upright.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLonger is not automatically better. A longer reacher places the object further from the hand and can feel less controlled with heavier or awkward items, so choose the shortest length that comfortably covers the intended tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUseful for Light Everyday Objects\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe clamping jaw is suited to many small household items that can be gripped securely, such as clothing, lightweight packets or objects dropped on the floor. The magnetic tip adds another option for small ferrous items that are difficult to pinch with the jaw.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Easireach is not designed for heavy lifting, body support or retrieving dangerous objects. Avoid hot cookware, sharp items, unstable loads or anything that could cause injury if it slips from the jaw.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eConvenient Storage on a Walking Aid\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe integrated clip can attach the reacher to a compatible walking stick or walking frame, helping keep it accessible without carrying it separately. Check that the stored reacher does not interfere with the walking aid's brakes, folding mechanism, wheels or normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmooth positive clamping action.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnhanced jaw grip with semicircular cut-outs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMagnetic tip\u003c\/strong\u003e for small ferrous metal objects.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eClip for a compatible walking stick or walking frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight reaching aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShort 650 mm and Long 820 mm variants\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable to ship NZ-wide.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat lengths are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart offers Short (650 mm) and Long (820 mm) variants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between the two lengths?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe longer version provides more reach, while the shorter version is more compact to handle and store.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the magnetic tip pick up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can attract small ferrous metal objects such as some pins and keys. Non-magnetic metals will not be attracted.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the semicircular cut-outs for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey help the jaw locate and grip around compatible shapes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it attach to a walking stick?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A clip is included for compatible walking sticks or frames.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for heavy lifting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a reaching aid for light everyday objects, not a lifting tool for heavy items.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used as a walking stick?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is not weight bearing and must not be used for balance or body support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it retrieve objects from the floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the object is light enough and can be securely gripped by the jaw.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it reach high shelves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the user can remain stable and the object is light and safe to retrieve overhead.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould it be used for hot or sharp objects?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Avoid objects that could cause burns, cuts or injury if dropped.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should be checked before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMake sure the trigger and jaw operate smoothly and the shaft and clip are undamaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered NZ-wide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Both Hull Easireach variants are available to ship throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent variants\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShort (650 mm); Long (820 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrip\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClamping jaw with semicircular cut-outs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTip\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMagnetic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWalking-stick \/ frame clip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart Mobility Equipment ","offers":[{"title":"Short (650mm)","offer_id":41716502691915,"sku":"CUB-HULLRCHR-650","price":59.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Long (820mm)","offer_id":41716502724683,"sku":"CUB-HULLRCHR-820","price":62.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/ReacherClaw.jpg?v=1756539766"},{"product_id":"heavy-duty-dual-motor-lift-chair","title":"Goldfern Heavy Duty Dual Motor Lift Recliner Chair","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Heavy-Duty Dual Motor Lift Recliner Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Heavy-Duty Dual Motor Lift Recliner Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e is the wider, higher-capacity option in Goldfern's lift-chair range. It combines powered sit-to-stand assistance with independent backrest and leg-rest adjustment, while a \u003cstrong\u003e220 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e and approximately \u003cstrong\u003e545 mm seat width\u003c\/strong\u003e provide more space and capacity than the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/electric-lift-recliner-chair\"\u003estandard Goldfern dual-motor\u003c\/a\u003e chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart offers Pale Grey and Steel Grey upholstery options. The chair also includes external battery backup, side magazine pockets and an extra-long corded hand control that can be positioned for left- or right-side use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eIndependent Back and Leg Adjustment\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe twin-motor system lets the backrest and leg rest move independently. This provides more flexibility than a linked single-motor recliner, allowing the user to change upper-body and leg position separately for sitting, reading, resting or reclining.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePowered Lift Assistance\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe lift function raises and tilts the chair forward to assist with moving from sitting toward standing. It can reduce the effort required to rise from the chair, but the user still needs an appropriate transfer plan and enough balance to stand safely once supported.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHeavy-Duty Size and Fit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe seat is approximately \u003cstrong\u003e545 mm wide between the arms\u003c\/strong\u003e, around \u003cstrong\u003e525 mm deep\u003c\/strong\u003e and approximately \u003cstrong\u003e460 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e. Overall chair width is about \u003cstrong\u003e920 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompared with the standard Goldfern Dual Motor Lift Recliner, the Heavy Duty model adds roughly 105 mm of seat width and increases user capacity from 150 kg to 220 kg. That makes it the better choice when the standard chair feels too narrow or a higher weight rating is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSeat dimensions still matter even with a heavy-duty chair. The best fit should allow the user to sit fully back with appropriate thigh support and feet supported when seated.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBattery Backup and Home Practicality\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn external battery backup provides limited operation during a power outage when correctly maintained. Magazine pockets are fitted on both sides, and the long hand-control lead gives flexibility in where the controller is positioned.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e220 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDual-motor system\u003c\/strong\u003e for independent backrest and leg-rest adjustment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowered lift function\u003c\/strong\u003e for sit-to-stand assistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e545 mm seat width\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e525 mm seat depth\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3M-protected upholstery\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMagazine pockets on both sides\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtra-long hand-control cord\u003c\/strong\u003e for left- or right-side use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExternal battery backup\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePale Grey and Steel Grey upholstery options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eActuator and remote warranty: \u003cstrong\u003e12 months\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame warranty: \u003cstrong\u003e24 months\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Lift_Chair_Installation_User_Manual_2.pdf?v=1756718430\" title=\"Goldfern Lift Chair Range Owners Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eGoldfern Electric Lift Chair Range Owners Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Goldfern Heavy-Duty Lift Chair best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who need a wider dual-motor lift recliner or a higher user capacity than the standard Goldfern lift chair provides.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the standard Goldfern Dual Motor Lift Chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Heavy Duty model has an approximately 545 mm seat width and 220 kg user capacity. The standard model is narrower at about 440 mm between the arms and supports up to 150 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does dual motor mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe backrest and leg rest can be adjusted independently rather than moving together as one linked mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the chair have a lift function?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It raises and tilts forward to assist the transition from sitting toward standing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this the Goldfern zero-gravity chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This is the Heavy-Duty Dual Motor Lift Chair and should not be confused with Goldfern's separate multi-motor \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/goldfern-zero-gravity-electric-lift-recliner-chair\"\u003eZero Gravity\u003c\/a\u003e model.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e220 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat depth?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 525 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the width inside the arms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 545 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 460 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the overall width?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 920 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have battery backup?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. An external battery backup is included and should be maintained according to the chair instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours does MoveSmart stock?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePale Grey and Steel Grey, subject to availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eActuator 12 months, remote 12 months and frame 24 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered throughout New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart can arrange delivery of lift chairs to customers across New Zealand. Get in touch if you would like help confirming chair size or delivery arrangements before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e525 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e545 mm inside arms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight to seat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e460 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e720 x 920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent MoveSmart colours\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePale Grey; Steel Grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActuator 12 months; remote 12 months; frame 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Pale Grey","offer_id":41955675668555,"sku":"GF-HDLIFTCHR-1","price":2095.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Steel Grey","offer_id":41955675701323,"sku":"GF-HDLIFTCHR-2","price":2095.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Heavy_Duty_Lift_Chair_no_remote.png?v=1780696983"},{"product_id":"single-fold-ramp","title":"Single Fold Ramp","description":"\u003ch2\u003ePride Mobility Single Fold Ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePride Mobility Single Fold Ramp\u003c\/strong\u003e is a portable aluminium access ramp for compatible manual wheelchairs, powerchairs and mobility scooters. It folds lengthwise for transport and storage, with a carry handle built into the frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart stocks five lengths from \u003cstrong\u003e61 cm (2 ft) to 183 cm (6 ft)\u003c\/strong\u003e. The ramp line has a maximum total load of \u003cstrong\u003e272 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. The correct ramp length depends on the height of the obstacle and the maximum permitted incline for the mobility device being used.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e272 kg maximum total load\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHigh-strength aluminium construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSingle-fold design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBuilt-in carry handle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive current MoveSmart lengths: 61, 91, 122, 152 and 183 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTextured walking\/rolling surface.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for compatible wheelchairs, powerchairs and mobility scooters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/AU_SingleFold-Ramps_11-12-2020.pdf?v=1762765089\" rel=\"noopener\" title=\"Pride Single Fold Ramp Specification Sheet\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ePride Single Fold Ramp Specification Sheet\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose Ramp Length Carefully\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA longer ramp generally creates a gentler slope for the same rise, but the acceptable incline is determined by the wheelchair, scooter or powerchair manufacturer and the individual situation. Never exceed the mobility device's permitted slope. Position the ramp on stable, level support surfaces and follow Pride's setup instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeasure the Rise Before Choosing a Ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Single Fold Ramp needs to be long enough for the vertical rise and the mobility device using it. A longer ramp creates a gentler approach, which is generally easier to manage than a short, steep setup. Measure the full rise, available landing space and doorway clearance, then consider the wheelchair or scooter wheelbase and any low under-frame components.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe supporting surfaces must be firm, level and able to hold the ramp securely at both ends. Check the published load rating against the combined weight of the user and mobility device, and follow the manufacturer’s guidance for gradient and assisted use. Practise on a controlled setup before relying on the ramp for regular access.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat lengths does MoveSmart stock?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e61 cm (2 ft), 91 cm (3 ft), 122 cm (4 ft), 152 cm (5 ft) and 183 cm (6 ft).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum total ramp load is 272 kg, including the mobility device and occupant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with a manual wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the ramp length, slope and load are appropriate for the wheelchair and user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with a powerchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the powerchair manufacturer permits the resulting incline and the total load remains within the ramp rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with a mobility scooter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, subject to the scooter's permitted incline, ground clearance, wheel position and combined weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I choose the right length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure the vertical rise and available horizontal space, then check the mobility device manufacturer's maximum safe incline. When in doubt, seek advice before choosing a ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the ramp fold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It folds lengthwise around a central hinge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a carry handle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A carry handle is built into the folded ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the ramp non-slip when wet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo ramp surface should be assumed slip-proof in wet conditions. Pride warns that the surface may become slippery when wet, so keep it dry and free from debris where possible and use extra caution in poor weather.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere should the top and bottom sit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bottom should be firmly supported on level ground and the top should sit securely against the step or vertical lip according to Pride's instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the ramp be secured?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow Pride's instructions for positioning and any supplied retaining hardware. The ramp must not shift during use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a pinch point?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Keep fingers clear of the centre hinge while folding or unfolding the ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan children play on the ramp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is an access device, not recreational equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the ramp be inspected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Check regularly for damage, wear or loose components and stop using it if its condition is questionable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a specification sheet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The existing Pride Single Fold Ramp Specification Sheet is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Pride Single Fold Ramp available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. All current ramp lengths are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent variant\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e2 ft\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e61 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e3 ft\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e91 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e4 ft\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e122 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e5 ft\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e152 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e6 ft\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e183 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum total load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e272 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium, single fold\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Pride Mobility","offers":[{"title":"61cm (2')","offer_id":41886649548875,"sku":"PRIDE-RAMPS-1","price":295.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"91 cm (3’)","offer_id":41886649581643,"sku":"PRIDE-RAMPS-2","price":395.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"122 cm (4’)","offer_id":41886649614411,"sku":"PRIDE-RAMPS-3","price":495.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"152 cm (5’)","offer_id":41886649647179,"sku":"PRIDE-RAMPS-4","price":645.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"183 cm (6’)","offer_id":41886649679947,"sku":"PRIDE-RAMPS-5","price":745.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/7e4126a6-7967-4f6e-9a82-081a9ea4acc1.jpg?v=1762764831"},{"product_id":"tri-fold-ramp","title":"Tri-Fold Ramp","description":"\u003ch2\u003eAMW Tri-Fold Ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eAMW Tri-Fold Ramp\u003c\/strong\u003e is a portable aluminium access ramp for compatible wheelchairs, power chairs and mobility scooters. Its two-piece tri-fold construction allows the full-width ramp to fold down for transport and storage, while carry handles and locking pins help with handling and setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart carries \u003cstrong\u003e6 ft and 8 ft variants\u003c\/strong\u003e. The ramp has a non-slip grip surface and a published maximum load capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e270 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. The current 6 ft specification is approximately 183 cm long when open and 92 cm long when folded.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTri-Fold Ramp or Telescopic Ramps?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eAMW Tri-Fold Ramp\u003c\/strong\u003e when you prefer a full-width rolling surface and want the choice of 6 ft or 8 ft lengths. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/telescopic-ramps\"\u003eAMW Telescopic Ramps\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e when you want two separate wheel channels that adjust from 3–6 ft and collapse more compactly for storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e6 ft and 8 ft variants\u003c\/strong\u003e available.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e270 kg maximum load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium construction\u003c\/strong\u003e for strength and portability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTri-fold, two-piece design\u003c\/strong\u003e for more compact storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-slip grip surface\u003c\/strong\u003e for improved traction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarry handles and locking pins\u003c\/strong\u003e for transport and secure setup.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e6 ft model opens to approximately 183 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e6 ft model folds to approximately 92 cm long\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSuitable for compatible wheelchairs, power chairs and mobility scooters\u003c\/strong\u003e when correctly positioned.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the AMW Tri-Fold Ramp?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tri-fold format provides a full-width travel path while packing down more compactly than a fixed ramp of the same nominal length. With two length options, a high load rating and portable aluminium construction, it is a flexible choice for temporary access at homes, vehicles and other suitable locations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeasure the Rise Before Choosing a Ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTri-Fold Ramp needs to be long enough for the vertical rise and the mobility device using it. A longer ramp produces a gentler approach, which is generally easier to manage than a short, steep setup. Measure the full rise, available landing space and doorway clearance, then consider the wheelchair or scooter wheelbase and any low under-frame components.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe supporting surfaces must be firm, level and able to hold the ramp securely at both ends. Check the published load rating against the combined weight of the user and mobility device, and follow the manufacturer’s guidance for gradient and assisted use. Practise on a controlled setup before relying on the ramp for regular access.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat length options are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart carries 6 ft and 8 ft variants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum load capacity?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published maximum load capacity is 270 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does this differ from the AMW Telescopic Ramps?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Tri-Fold provides a full-width platform in fixed 6 ft or 8 ft lengths. The telescopic ramps are two separate wheel channels that adjust from 3–6 ft and pack down smaller.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the ramp made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp is constructed from aluminium.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the ramp fold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt uses a two-piece tri-fold design that folds into a more compact package for storage and transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the 6 ft version?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current 6 ft specification is approximately 183 cm long when open and 92 cm long when folded.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow wide is the 6 ft version?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 6 ft ramp is approximately 76 cm wide when open and 38 cm wide when folded.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the 6 ft ramp weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current 6 ft specification is approximately 16 kg for the ramp pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have an anti-slip surface?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The ramp has a non-slip grip surface designed to improve traction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre carry handles included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Carry handles and locking pins are part of the portable design.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with a mobility scooter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, for compatible scooters where the total load is within the ramp rating and the ramp can be positioned securely at an appropriate slope.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with a wheelchair or power chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is designed for compatible wheelchairs and mobility chairs as well as scooters.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I choose between 6 ft and 8 ft?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe appropriate length depends on the vertical rise, available landing space and mobility device. A longer ramp generally allows a gentler slope for the same rise, but always follow the ramp and mobility-device safety guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the AMW Tri-Fold Ramp available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Both current ramp lengths are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePortable tri-fold access ramp\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable sizes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 ft and 8 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e270 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDesign\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTri-fold, two-piece\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSurface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-slip grip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTransport features\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarry handles and locking pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e6 ft open length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 183 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e6 ft folded length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 92 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e6 ft open width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 76 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e6 ft folded width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 38 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e6 ft weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 16 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"AMW","offers":[{"title":"6 Foot","offer_id":41886658756683,"sku":"AMW-TRIFOLDRAMP-1","price":650.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 Foot","offer_id":41886658789451,"sku":"AMW-TRIFOLDRAMP-2","price":750.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/efea4a_8e2450734e524e8e99621e92c00cb3f5_mv2.avif?v=1762767321"},{"product_id":"telescopic-ramps","title":"Telescopic Ramps","description":"\u003ch2\u003eAMW Telescopic Ramps\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eAMW Telescopic Ramps\u003c\/strong\u003e provide a portable pair of aluminium channel ramps for wheelchairs and mobility scooters. Each ramp uses a two-section telescopic design that extends from \u003cstrong\u003e91 cm (3 ft) to 183 cm (6 ft)\u003c\/strong\u003e, allowing the length to be adjusted for different access situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe pair supports up to \u003cstrong\u003e300 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and weighs approximately \u003cstrong\u003e12 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. Each ramp is 27 cm wide and has an anti-slip textured surface plus stainless-steel flip locks to secure the selected length.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTelescopic Ramps or Tri-Fold Ramp?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eAMW Telescopic Ramps\u003c\/strong\u003e when you want two separate wheel channels that adjust in length and collapse compactly for storage. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/tri-fold-ramp\"\u003eAMW Tri-Fold Ramp\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e when a full-width platform is preferable; it is available in 6 ft and 8 ft lengths but is heavier and less adjustable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e91–183 cm adjustable length\u003c\/strong\u003e per ramp.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo-section telescopic design\u003c\/strong\u003e for compact storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e300 kg maximum load capacity per pair\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12 kg approximate pair weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e27 cm width per ramp\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightweight aluminium construction\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnti-slip textured surface\u003c\/strong\u003e for improved traction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless-steel flip locks\u003c\/strong\u003e secure the chosen length.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSuitable for wheelchairs and mobility scooters\u003c\/strong\u003e when correctly positioned and used within the published capacity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOptional carry\/storage bag compatibility\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose AMW Telescopic Ramps?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTelescopic channel ramps are useful when a full-width folding ramp would be less convenient to transport or store. The adjustable 3–6 ft length lets the pair be configured for different access points while retaining a compact collapsed size.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeasure the Rise Before Choosing a Ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTelescopic Ramps needs to be long enough for the vertical rise and the mobility device using it. A longer ramp produces a gentler approach, which is generally easier to manage than a short, steep setup. Measure the full rise, available landing space and doorway clearance, then consider the wheelchair or scooter wheelbase and any low under-frame components.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe supporting surfaces must be firm, level and able to hold the ramp securely at both ends. Check the published load rating against the combined weight of the user and mobility device, and follow the manufacturer’s guidance for gradient and assisted use. Practise on a controlled setup before relying on the ramp for regular access.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat length do the ramps adjust to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach ramp adjusts from approximately 91 cm (3 ft) to 183 cm (6 ft).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum load capacity?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum published load capacity is 300 kg per pair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much do the ramps weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe pair weighs approximately 12 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow wide is each ramp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach individual channel ramp is approximately 27 cm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do these differ from the AMW Tri-Fold Ramp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe telescopic ramps are two separate adjustable channels and pack down smaller. The Tri-Fold Ramp gives a full-width surface and is available in fixed 6 ft and 8 ft lengths.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the ramps made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey are made from lightweight aluminium.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the selected length secured?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStainless-steel flip locks secure the telescopic sections at the chosen length.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo the ramps have a non-slip surface?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. They have an anti-slip textured surface designed to improve traction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they be used with a mobility scooter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, they are designed for compatible wheelchairs and mobility scooters, provided the total load is within 300 kg and the wheel track fits securely on the two channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they be used with a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The two separate channels can be positioned to suit a compatible wheelchair wheel track.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre they suitable for travel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The telescopic sections collapse to 91 cm, making them easier to store and transport than fixed-length 6 ft ramps.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a carry bag included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA carry\/storage bag is an optional compatible accessory; it should not be assumed to be included unless shown with the selected purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should I choose a safe ramp length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe correct ramp length depends on the rise, available landing space and mobility device. Avoid using a ramp at an excessively steep angle and follow the mobility device and ramp safety instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the AMW Telescopic Ramps available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. These ramps are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePair of telescopic channel ramps\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCollapsed length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e91 cm \/ 3 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eExtended length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e183 cm \/ 6 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth per ramp\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e27 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePair weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 12 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg per pair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSurface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAnti-slip textured finish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLocking mechanism\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlip locks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSections\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-section telescopic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatible mobility aids\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible wheelchairs and mobility scooters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"AMW","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41886664327243,"sku":"AMW-TELERAMPS","price":590.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/7FT-Lightweight-High-Strength-Aluminium-Telescopic-Wheelchair-Mobility-Scooter-Ramps1.webp?v=1762767914"},{"product_id":"pride-mobility-rubber-threshold-ramp","title":"Pride Mobility Rubber Threshold Ramp","description":"\u003ch2\u003ePride Mobility Rubber Threshold Ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePride Mobility Rubber Threshold Ramp\u003c\/strong\u003e is a modular recycled-rubber access ramp for small thresholds, low steps and changes in floor level. Its interlocking sections create a broad rolling surface for compatible wheelchairs, powerchairs, mobility scooters and other suitable wheeled equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e385.5 kg (850 lb) maximum load\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHigh-impact recycled rubber construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e91.4 cm usable width\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHidden dovetail interlocking system.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCurrent MoveSmart rise options from \u003cstrong\u003e2.5 cm (1 inch) to 10.16 cm (4 inches)\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHalf-inch incremental rise options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum recommended incline approximately \u003cstrong\u003e4° (7%)\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for appropriate indoor and outdoor locations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTextured slip-resistant surface.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be trimmed or notched where an appropriate custom fit is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaintenance-free rubber construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eModular system note:\u003c\/strong\u003e higher ramp configurations use the lower-height sections together. For example, a 2.5-inch rise uses the 1, 1.5, 2 and 2.5-inch sections as the designed interlocking system.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/AU_ThresholdRamps_11-12-2020.pdf?v=1762768822\" title=\"Pride Mobility Rubber Threshold Ramps Specification Sheet\"\u003ePride Mobility Rubber Threshold Ramps Specification Sheet\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeasure the Rise Before Choosing a Ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePride Mobility Rubber Threshold Ramp needs to be long enough for the vertical rise and the mobility device using it. A longer ramp produces a gentler approach, which is generally easier to manage than a short, steep setup. Measure the full rise, available landing space and doorway clearance, then consider the wheelchair or scooter wheelbase and any low under-frame components.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe supporting surfaces must be firm, level and able to hold the ramp securely at both ends. Check the published load rating against the combined weight of the user and mobility device, and follow the manufacturer’s guidance for gradient and assisted use. Practise on a controlled setup before relying on the ramp for regular access.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat rise options does MoveSmart currently offer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e2.5 cm (1 inch), 3.8 cm (1.5 inch), 5.1 cm (2 inch), 6.4 cm (2.5 inch), 7.6 cm (3 inch), 8.89 cm (3.5 inch) and 10.16 cm (4 inch).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow wide is the usable ramp surface?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 91.4 cm (36 inches).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum load is 385.5 kg or 850 lb, including the mobility device and occupant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum recommended incline?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePride specifies a maximum incline of approximately 4 degrees or 7 percent for this threshold-ramp system.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the chosen rise, slope and clearances are appropriate for the wheelchair and user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with a mobility scooter or powerchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the device manufacturer permits the resulting incline and the combined load stays within the ramp rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used outdoors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The recycled-rubber construction is intended for suitable indoor or outdoor installations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the surface completely slip-proof when wet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo surface should be assumed completely slip-proof. Keep the ramp clean and take additional care when it is wet, contaminated or icy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo the higher sections work by themselves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp is a modular interlocking system. Higher rises are created using the appropriate preceding sections together, so confirm which components are required for the intended height.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the ramp be cut to fit a doorway?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Pride specifies that the rubber can be trimmed or notched for an appropriate custom fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require routine maintenance?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rubber ramp itself is described as maintenance-free, but it should still be kept clean and checked for movement, damage or obstruction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the ramp be secured against movement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe setup must remain stable during use. Follow the Pride instructions for initial setup and positioning, particularly where the threshold surface is unusual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a specification sheet available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The existing Pride Rubber Threshold Ramps specification sheet is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Pride Rubber Threshold Ramp available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The available ramp sizes are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent variant\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRise\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e1 inch\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e1.5 inch\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e2 inch\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.1 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e2.5 inch\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.4 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e3 inch\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.6 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e3.5 inch\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.89 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e4 inch\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10.16 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUsable width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e91.4 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e385.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum incline\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4° \/ 7%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Pride Mobility","offers":[{"title":"2.5 cm (1”)","offer_id":41886672289867,"sku":"PRIDE-RUBBERRAMP-1","price":150.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.8 cm (1.5”)","offer_id":41886672322635,"sku":"PRIDE-RUBBERRAMP-2","price":160.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5.1 cm (2”)","offer_id":41886672355403,"sku":"PRIDE-RUBBERRAMP-3","price":170.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6.4 cm (2.5”)","offer_id":41886672388171,"sku":"PRIDE-RUBBERRAMP-4","price":180.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7.6 cm (3”)","offer_id":41886672420939,"sku":"PRIDE-RUBBERRAMP-5","price":190.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8.89 cm (3.5\")","offer_id":41886672453707,"sku":"PRIDE-RUBBERRAMP-6","price":200.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10.16 cm (4\")","offer_id":41886672486475,"sku":"PRIDE-RUBBERRAMP-7","price":210.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Pride-Rubber-Threshold-Ramp-01.jpg?v=1762768679"},{"product_id":"icare-bed-wedges-small-large","title":"icare Supporta Bed Wedge – Small \u0026 Large","description":"\u003ch2\u003eicare Supporta Bed Wedge – Small \u0026amp; Large\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eicare Supporta Bed Wedge\u003c\/strong\u003e range provides a stable inclined surface for people who need broader upper-body or lower-leg elevation than a small positioning cushion can provide. The \u003cstrong\u003eSmall\u003c\/strong\u003e version is compact and adjustable, while the \u003cstrong\u003eLarge\u003c\/strong\u003e version provides a wider contact area and a slightly steeper incline.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Small Wedge measures approximately \u003cstrong\u003e69 x 59 x 16 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e with a \u003cstrong\u003e15° incline\u003c\/strong\u003e. It includes a removable insert for adjusting the depth and folds for easier storage or transport. The Large Wedge measures approximately \u003cstrong\u003e68 x 78 x 21 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e with a \u003cstrong\u003e17° incline\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be positioned on top of or beneath the mattress depending on the required setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth sizes can be used to elevate the upper body or support the feet and lower legs. Breathable Vant™ fabric encourages airflow and the removable covers are washable for routine care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhich Size Should I Choose?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eSmall Bed Wedge\u003c\/strong\u003e when compact size, folding storage and adjustable depth are the priorities. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003eLarge Bed Wedge\u003c\/strong\u003e when a wider support surface and slightly greater elevation are more useful, or when the wedge needs to be positioned beneath the mattress.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor a small local adjustment behind the back, under the abdomen or between the knees, the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/icare-body-positioning-pillow-wedge\"\u003eSupporta Body Positioning Pillow\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is less bulky. For full-body mouldable support, the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/icare-body-pillow\"\u003eSupporta Body Pillow\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is more versatile. The Bed Wedge is the better choice when the goal is broad, consistent elevation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo sizes\u003c\/strong\u003e for compact or broader elevation support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSmall:\u003c\/strong\u003e approximately 69 x 59 x 16 cm, 15° incline.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLarge:\u003c\/strong\u003e approximately 68 x 78 x 21 cm, 17° incline.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003eupper-body or lower-leg elevation\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSmall Wedge removable insert\u003c\/strong\u003e for adjustable depth.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSmall Wedge folding design\u003c\/strong\u003e for storage and transport.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLarge Wedge\u003c\/strong\u003e can be used on top of or beneath the mattress.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreathable Vant™ fabric\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRemovable washable covers\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUsing a Bed Wedge Safely\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wedge should sit securely without sliding or creating an unstable edge. When used for upper-body elevation, make sure the user is supported over a broad enough area rather than bending sharply at the waist. When elevating the legs, check that the position is comfortable and does not create unwanted pressure behind the knees or at the heels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eElevation can be useful for comfort in a range of situations, but it does not replace medical assessment or prescribed treatment for reflux, respiratory conditions, swelling or circulation problems.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the icare Supporta Bed Wedge used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides broad, stable upper-body or lower-leg elevation during rest, sleep and recovery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between the Small and Large wedges?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Small is more compact, folds and has adjustable depth. The Large provides a wider support surface, a 17° incline and can be positioned on or beneath the mattress.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the Small Wedge dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 69 x 59 x 16 cm with a 15° incline.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the Large Wedge dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 68 x 78 x 21 cm with a 17° incline.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan either wedge be used for upper-body elevation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Both can support the head and upper torso in a more elevated resting position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they be used under the legs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Both can be used to support the lower legs and feet where that position is appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Small Wedge adjustable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It includes a removable insert that changes the support depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Small Wedge fold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its folding construction makes it easier to store and transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the Large Wedge go underneath the mattress?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Large Wedge can be positioned on top of or beneath the mattress depending on the intended setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the Bed Wedge different from the Body Positioning Pillow?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bed Wedge provides broad elevation. The Body Positioning Pillow is a small 38 x 25 cm wedge for targeted local support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan a bed wedge help with reflux-related comfort?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUpper-body elevation can help some people feel more comfortable, but persistent reflux should be discussed with an appropriate health professional and the wedge should not be treated as medical treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for respiratory comfort?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSome people find a more upright resting position more comfortable than lying flat. Individual medical advice should be followed where respiratory symptoms are present.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the covers washable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Both wedges have removable washable covers; follow iCare’s care instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the iCare product codes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Small Wedge is IC182 and the Large Wedge is IC172.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth sizes include a 2-year standard warranty, subject to iCare’s warranty terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the icare Supporta Bed Wedge available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The icare Supporta Bed Wedge is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSmall Wedge\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLarge Wedge\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eiCare product code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIC182\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIC172\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e69 x 59 x 16 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e68 x 78 x 21 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIncline\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUpper-body or lower-leg elevation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUpper-body or lower-leg elevation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable insert for adjustable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixed wedge profile\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFolding design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull-size wedge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMattress positioning\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTypically used on the mattress\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCan be used on top of or beneath the mattress\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBreathable Vant™; removable and washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBreathable Vant™; removable and washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"iCare","offers":[{"title":"Small - 69cm (L) x 59cm (W) x 16cm (H)","offer_id":41904720707659,"sku":"ICARE-IC182","price":79.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Large - 68cm (L) x 78cm (W) x 21cm (H)","offer_id":43049543073867,"sku":"ICARE-IC172","price":135.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/IC_Bed_Wedge_Small_Large_render_6333c17c-2e3a-4728-8d83-3536936fae5f.png?v=1763284653"},{"product_id":"icare-back-cushion","title":"icare Supporta Back Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eAdaptive Lumbar Support for Everyday Seating\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eicare Supporta Back Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e supports the natural curve of the spine with a responsive ActiveX™ core and contoured lateral supports. It is designed for supportive back comfort in wheelchairs, vehicles, office chairs and seating throughout the home.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ActiveX™ core adapts to body shape for targeted lower-back support, while the contoured sides gently cradle the body to improve positioning and seated stability. A fully adjustable back strap helps secure the cushion across different chairs, and breathable Vant™ fabric encourages airflow during longer periods of sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt \u003cstrong\u003e32 x 32 x 8–10 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the cushion is lightweight enough to move between seating environments. Its zip-off washable cover supports straightforward everyday care, and its Low–Medium risk \/ Medium Feel classification suits general supportive seating needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eicare Supporta Back Cushion – Key Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eActiveX™ core\u003c\/strong\u003e for adaptive lower-back support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eContoured lateral supports\u003c\/strong\u003e to assist positioning and seated stability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable back strap\u003c\/strong\u003e for a secure fit across different chairs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpinal alignment support\u003c\/strong\u003e for a more supported seated posture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreathable Vant™ fabric\u003c\/strong\u003e with a 3D structure that encourages airflow.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZip-off washable cover\u003c\/strong\u003e for practical care.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 x 32 x 8–10 cm dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e in a compact portable format.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow–Medium risk classification\u003c\/strong\u003e with a Medium Feel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the icare Supporta Back Cushion?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Supporta Back Cushion provides broader support than a simple lumbar roll, combining adaptive ActiveX™ material, lateral contouring and an adjustable strap in one portable cushion. It can move between home, office, vehicle and wheelchair seating while maintaining a consistent support profile.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eicare Supporta Back Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the icare Supporta Back Cushion designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed to support the natural curve of the spine and provide added lower-back comfort while seated.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is ActiveX™?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eActiveX™ is a responsive foam material that adapts to body shape to provide targeted support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat do the contoured lateral supports do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey gently cradle the body to improve positioning and provide greater stability while seated.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill the cushion stay in position?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA fully adjustable back strap helps secure the cushion across different seating environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat chairs can it be used with?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used with wheelchairs, office chairs, vehicle seats and a range of home seating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Back Cushion measures 32 x 32 cm with a depth of approximately 8–10 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cushion breathable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Vant™ fabric uses a three-dimensional structure to promote airflow between the cushion and the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the cover be washed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cover is zip-off and washable. Follow the supplied care instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it differ from a lumbar roll?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Back Cushion has a broader contoured surface with lateral support, while a lumbar roll provides more localised support across a smaller area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be moved between home, work and the car?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its lightweight design and adjustable strap make it practical to move between different chairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the product code?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe product code is IC167.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Supporta Back Cushion includes a 2-year standard warranty, subject to the applicable warranty terms and conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eicare Supporta Back Cushion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIC167\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32 x 32 x 8–10 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCore\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActiveX™\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSupport design\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContoured lateral support\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttachment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFully adjustable back strap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBreathable Vant™ fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover care\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eZip-off washable cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRisk category\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow–Medium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eComfort category\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium Feel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSuitable for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheelchairs, vehicles, office chairs and home seating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"iCare","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41904741548107,"sku":"ICARE-IC167","price":59.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/IC167BackCushionRender.png?v=1787135922"},{"product_id":"icare-bariatric-seat-cushion","title":"icare Supporta Bariatric Seat Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHeavy-Duty Bariatric Seating Support and Pressure Redistribution\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eicare Supporta Bariatric Seat Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed to provide enhanced comfort, support and stability for bariatric users across wheelchairs, lift chairs, recliners and home seating. Its generous \u003cstrong\u003e50 x 45 x 10 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e surface combines ergonomic contouring with a heavy-duty three-layer construction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe three-layer design combines pressure redistribution, stability and support, with a high-density core built for demanding everyday use. A removable insert allows the cushion depth to be adjusted for a more personalised fit, while breathable Vant™ fabric encourages airflow and helps reduce heat build-up during extended sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion has a \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e, a Low–Medium risk classification and a Medium Feel. A zip-off washable cover supports routine care and helps make the cushion practical for home, rehabilitation and care environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eicare Supporta Bariatric Seat Cushion – Key Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e250 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e for heavy-duty bariatric seating.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-layer construction\u003c\/strong\u003e combining pressure redistribution, stability and support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeavy-duty high-density core\u003c\/strong\u003e for dependable daily use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic contoured surface\u003c\/strong\u003e for supported sitting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable depth\u003c\/strong\u003e using a removable insert.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e50 x 45 x 10 cm dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e with a generous seating area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreathable Vant™ fabric\u003c\/strong\u003e to encourage airflow.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZip-off washable cover\u003c\/strong\u003e for routine care.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow–Medium risk classification\u003c\/strong\u003e with a Medium Feel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the icare Supporta Bariatric Seat Cushion?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis cushion is purpose-built for users who need a wider, more stable and higher-capacity seating surface than a standard cushion provides. Its three-layer construction and adjustable depth combine heavy-duty support with practical pressure redistribution and everyday comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eicare Supporta Bariatric Seat Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Supporta Bariatric Seat Cushion designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed specifically for bariatric seating and can also suit users who need a firmer, more supportive seat cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the safe working load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe safe working load is 250 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the cushion dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion measures 50 x 45 x 10 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat makes the three-layer design useful?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe three layers combine pressure redistribution, stability and support for extended sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cushion depth adjustable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A removable insert allows the depth to be adjusted for a more personalised fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of core does it use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt uses a heavy-duty high-density core within its three-layer construction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cover breathable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Vant™ fabric uses a three-dimensional structure to promote airflow between the cushion and the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the cover be washed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cover is zip-off and washable. Follow the supplied care instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is suitable for appropriately sized bariatric wheelchairs and other stable seating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a lift chair or recliner?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It can be used in lift chairs, recliners and home seating where the cushion dimensions fit safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the product code?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe product code is IC188.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Supporta Bariatric Seat Cushion includes a 2-year standard warranty, subject to the applicable warranty terms and conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eicare Supporta Bariatric Seat Cushion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIC188\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 x 45 x 10 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSafe working load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-layer design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCore\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy-duty high-density foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable insert for adjustable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBreathable Vant™ fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover care\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eZip-off washable cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRisk category\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow–Medium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eComfort category\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium Feel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSuitable for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBariatric wheelchairs, lift chairs, recliners and home seating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"iCare","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41904803938379,"sku":"ICARE-IC188","price":119.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/BariatricCushion_ClearCut.png?v=1763283832"},{"product_id":"icare-body-positioning-pillow-wedge","title":"icare Supporta Body Positioning Pillow (Wedge)","description":"\u003ch2\u003eicare Supporta Body Positioning Pillow – Compact Adjustable Wedge\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eicare Supporta Body Positioning Pillow (Wedge)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a small positioning support for situations where one specific area needs gentle, controlled support rather than a full-length body pillow. At approximately \u003cstrong\u003e38 x 25 x 8 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, it can be placed behind the back, beneath the abdomen, between the knees or under another body area where a compact wedge is more practical than stacking ordinary pillows.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion uses \u003cstrong\u003eActiveX™\u003c\/strong\u003e material for responsive support and includes a \u003cstrong\u003eremovable insert\u003c\/strong\u003e so its height can be reduced when less lift is required. Breathable Vant™ fabric encourages airflow, while the zip-off cover is removable for washing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhen Should I Choose This Wedge?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eBody Positioning Pillow\u003c\/strong\u003e when the support requirement is \u003cstrong\u003esmall and targeted\u003c\/strong\u003e. For broad support around the torso, hips and legs, the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/icare-body-pillow\"\u003eSupporta Body Pillow\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is more versatile. For upper-body or lower-leg elevation across a much wider area, the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/icare-bed-wedges-small-large\"\u003eSupporta Bed Wedge\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is the better fit. For shoulder-specific post-operative positioning, use the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/icare-rotator-cuff-recovery-pillow\"\u003eRotator Cuff Recovery Pillow\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause this cushion is compact, it can also be useful as one component in a larger positioning setup. Where positioning is being used for rehabilitation, pressure care or after surgery, the overall arrangement should follow the user’s clinical plan rather than relying on a cushion alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e38 x 25 x 8 cm compact wedge\u003c\/strong\u003e for localised positioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eActiveX™ support material\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRemovable insert\u003c\/strong\u003e allows the height to be adjusted.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be used behind the \u003cstrong\u003eback, beneath the abdomen, between the knees\u003c\/strong\u003e or in other targeted positions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful for \u003cstrong\u003eside lying, pregnancy, recovery and everyday positioning\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreathable Vant™ fabric\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZip-off washable cover\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer classification: \u003cstrong\u003eLow–Medium risk\u003c\/strong\u003e with a \u003cstrong\u003eMedium Feel\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUsing a Small Positioning Wedge\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wedge should fill a gap or provide gentle support without forcing the body into an uncomfortable angle. If 8 cm is more height than needed, remove the insert and reassess the position. More than one wedge can be used where appropriate, but multiple cushions should not create unstable stacking or concentrated pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the Body Positioning Pillow designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides small, targeted support for side lying, pregnancy, recovery and general positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt measures approximately 38 x 25 x 8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the height adjustable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A removable insert allows the support height to be reduced.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere can the wedge be placed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCommon positions include behind the back, under the abdomen and between the knees, although the most appropriate placement depends on the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Supporta Body Pillow?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Body Pillow is full length and mouldable for broad support. This wedge is much smaller and better when support is needed in one precise area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Supporta Bed Wedge?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bed Wedge provides broad upper-body or lower-leg elevation. The Body Positioning Pillow is a small local positioning cushion rather than an elevation platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used during pregnancy?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its compact size can make it useful beneath the abdomen, behind the back or between the knees during side lying.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used after surgery?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may be useful as part of a recovery-positioning setup, but post-operative positioning should follow the instructions of the treating clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is ActiveX™?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eActiveX™ is iCare’s responsive elastic support material, designed to soften with warmth and contour around the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does Low–Medium risk mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat is the manufacturer’s pressure-care classification for the cushion. It does not replace an individual pressure-risk assessment or an appropriate pressure-care mattress when one is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan multiple wedges be used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the overall setup remains stable and appropriate. Avoid unstable stacking or positions that create unwanted pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cover breathable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Vant™ fabric is designed to encourage airflow.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the cover be washed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cover is removable and washable; follow iCare’s supplied care instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the product code and warranty?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe product code is IC191 and the standard warranty is 2 years, subject to iCare’s warranty terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the icare Supporta Body Positioning Pillow available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The icare Supporta Body Positioning Pillow is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eicare Supporta Body Positioning Pillow (Wedge)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIC191\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 x 25 x 8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActiveX™\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable insert for adjustable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBreathable Vant™ fabric; zip-off and washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer risk category\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow–Medium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eComfort category\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium Feel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical uses\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide lying, pregnancy, recovery and targeted body positioning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"iCare","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41904910532683,"sku":"ICARE-IC191","price":45.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/BodyPositioningWedge_render.png?v=1787137288"},{"product_id":"icare-coccyx-wedge","title":"icare Supporta Coccyx Wedge","description":"\u003ch2\u003eTargeted Coccyx Pressure Relief and Postural Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eicare Supporta Coccyx Wedge\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed to reduce direct pressure on the coccyx while encouraging a more comfortable seated position. Its coccyx cut-out and ergonomic wedge shape help redistribute contact away from the tailbone and gently support a more natural pelvic position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA responsive ActiveX™ core provides pressure-relieving support, while a removable insert allows the cushion height to be adjusted for different users and chairs. Breathable Vant® fabric encourages airflow during extended sitting, and the zip-off washable cover supports practical everyday care. A waterproof cover option is also available.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasuring \u003cstrong\u003e40 x 42 x 7 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e at the thick end, the wedge is suitable for home, office, travel and selected wheelchair seating. It has a Low–Medium risk classification and a Medium Feel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eicare Supporta Coccyx Wedge – Key Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCoccyx cut-out\u003c\/strong\u003e to reduce direct tailbone pressure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic wedge shape\u003c\/strong\u003e to encourage a more natural sitting position.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eActiveX™ pressure-relieving core\u003c\/strong\u003e for responsive support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable support height\u003c\/strong\u003e using a removable insert.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e40 x 42 x 7 cm dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e at the thick end.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreathable Vant® fabric\u003c\/strong\u003e to promote airflow.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZip-off washable cover\u003c\/strong\u003e for routine care.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWaterproof cover option\u003c\/strong\u003e for additional protection where required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow–Medium risk classification\u003c\/strong\u003e with a Medium Feel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the icare Supporta Coccyx Wedge?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Coccyx Wedge combines targeted offloading with a gently angled seating surface, making it different from a flat general-purpose cushion. Its adjustable insert and breathable cover make it practical across a range of everyday seating environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eicare Supporta Coccyx Wedge should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the icare Supporta Coccyx Wedge used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed to reduce direct pressure on the coccyx while supporting a more comfortable seated posture.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the coccyx cut-out work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cut-out reduces direct contact beneath the tailbone so pressure is distributed through the surrounding seating surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the wedge shape do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ergonomic wedge gently tilts the pelvis forward to encourage a more natural sitting position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cushion height adjustable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A removable insert allows the support height to be adjusted for a more personalised fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is ActiveX™?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eActiveX™ is a responsive support material used in the cushion core to provide pressure-relieving comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Coccyx Wedge measures 40 x 42 x 7 cm at the thick end.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cover breathable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Vant® fabric uses a three-dimensional structure to encourage airflow between the cushion and the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the cover be washed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cover is zip-off and washable. Follow the supplied care instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a waterproof option available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A waterproof cover option is available for users who need additional surface protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can suit selected wheelchair seating applications where its dimensions and support profile are appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the product code?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe product code is IC171.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Supporta Coccyx Wedge includes a 2-year standard warranty, subject to the applicable warranty terms and conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eicare Supporta Coccyx Wedge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIC171\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 x 42 x 7 cm at thick end\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCore\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActiveX™ pressure-relieving core\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDesign\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic wedge with coccyx cut-out\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable insert for adjustable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBreathable Vant® fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover care\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eZip-off washable cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWaterproof option\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRisk category\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow–Medium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eComfort category\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium Feel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-year standard warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"iCare","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41904911220811,"sku":"ICARE-IC171","price":55.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/IC168_Coccyx_Cushion.png?v=1787137911"}],"url":"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/collections\/shop-seating-daily-living.oembed","provider":"MoveSmart Mobility Equipment ","version":"1.0","type":"link"}